JP2022066535A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of simplifying control for resident symbols and further preventing a player from misunderstanding decorative symbols and the resident symbols.

SOLUTION: When a variation is started, a plurality of resident symbols is, despite number symbols (an image P2A shown in Fig. 19) of the resident symbols that were stopped the last time, switched to number symbols ("123") of the resident symbols that are different from each other and that have been predetermined. Then, the plurality of the resident symbols is switched so that the display mode of the resident symbols during the variation is switched to be added or subtracted one after another without having a ready-to-win mode or a winning mode (screen examples shown in Fig. 19 (c) to (e)) and variably displayed in a liquid crystal display device 41.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 19

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an arrange ball machine, a sparrow ball game machine, and a slot. Regarding the gaming machines that can be.

As a game machine such as a conventional pachinko machine, for example, a game machine as described in Patent Document 1 is known. This gaming machine displays decorative symbols and resident symbols, and does not add a special image to the resident symbols. Specifically, during other productions, the resident symbol is not stopped, and in the chance eye production, a special symbol is added to the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed by temporary stop, but the resident symbol that is stopped and displayed is a special symbol. Is not added.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-175120

However, since the above-mentioned gaming machine needs to be controlled such as stopping the resident symbol so as to match the decorative symbol during fluctuation, there is a problem that the control for the resident symbol is still complicated.

Therefore, in view of the above problems, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying control over a resident symbol and further preventing a player from misidentifying a decorative symbol and a resident symbol.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. In addition, although the reference numerals of the embodiments described later are added in parentheses, the present invention is not limited thereto.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 41 shown in FIG. 5) is accompanied by the identification information corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery process caused by the predetermined signal is executed. The decorative design displayed on the
A resident symbol that is residently displayed on the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 41 shown in FIG. 5) in a size smaller than the decorative symbol.
It has a notice effect execution means (for example, the sub-control CPU 800a shown in FIG. 6) capable of executing a predetermined notice effect.
The plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) have a variation content of a variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result and a variation mode according to a variation time (for example, the decoration shown in FIG. 21 (c)). It is displayed on the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 41 shown in FIG. 5) in the normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA for a symbol.
The plurality of resident symbols (left resident symbol, middle resident symbol, right resident symbol) are composed of numerical symbols.
When the resident symbol is stopped, the numerical symbol is a stop mode indicated by the same number as the number indicated by the stop symbol of the plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol). Is displayed on the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 41 shown in FIG. 5), and further.
When the resident symbol is fluctuating, the number symbol is switched so that the numbers indicated by the resident symbol are sequentially added or subtracted regardless of the fluctuation content of the fluctuation pattern (for example, FIG. 21). It is displayed on the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 41 shown in FIG. 5) in the resident symbol variation scenario ZS_DATA shown in (b).
The plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) are stopped or stopped after switching the variation mode of at least one decorative symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol) from high-speed variation to deceleration variation. When the deceleration fluctuation is started, the decorative symbol that fluctuates at high speed in a translucent state is matched with the stop symbol that can be determined to be stopped or stopped after the deceleration fluctuation. It was replaced with the decorative design of, and the deceleration fluctuation started.
The plurality of resident symbols (left resident symbol, middle resident symbol, right resident symbol) are different from each other regardless of the numerical symbol of the previously stopped resident symbol (for example, see image P2A shown in FIG. 19) when the fluctuation starts. After switching to a predetermined numerical symbol of the resident symbol (for example, "123"), the display mode of the resident symbol in change is switched so as to be sequentially added or subtracted without becoming a reach mode and a hit mode. (For example, refer to the screen example shown in FIGS. 19 (c) to 19 (e).) The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 41 shown in FIG. 5) is displayed in a variable manner.
The plurality of decorative symbols (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) are varied according to the variation content and variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result (for example, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 21 (c)). When the fluctuation starts in the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA), the resident symbol starts to fluctuate, but the decorative symbol changes to a predetermined display mode in which the player can recognize the decorative symbol that was stopped last time. After executing the predetermined advance notice effect to be changed to, the decorative symbol is started to change by a predetermined time after the start of the change of the resident symbol (see, for example, FIG. 34), and the change is started after the predetermined time. Is characterized in that the fluctuation is stopped at the same timing as the timing at which the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation mode when the effect is not executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to simplify the control of the resident symbol and further prevent the player from misunderstanding the decorative symbol and the resident symbol.

It is a perspective view which shows the appearance of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front side perspective view which shows the state which opened the door of the gaming machine before mounting the gaming board which concerns on the said embodiment. It is a front view which shows the state which opened the door of the gaming machine before mounting the gaming board which concerns on the said embodiment. It is a perspective view of the back side which shows the appearance of the gaming machine which concerns on the same embodiment. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on the same embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control device of the gaming machine which concerns on the same embodiment. It is a circuit diagram around the measurement / setting display device mounted on the main control board which concerns on the same embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a memory area of the main control RAM according to the same embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a memory map showing a memory area of the main control ROM according to the same embodiment. A diagram of the effect scenario table according to the same embodiment is shown, (a) shows a diagram in which a plurality of effect scenario data are stored, and (b) is stored in one layer data of the effect scenario data shown in (a). (C) is a diagram showing a control table referred to by the control code data shown in (b). It is a block diagram which shows the VDP which concerns on the same embodiment. (A) is a timing chart diagram showing the case where the number of start-holding balls is subtracted from 1 to 0 and the customer waiting demo command is not missing, and (b) is the case where the number of start-holding balls is 1. A timing chart diagram showing a case where the number is subtracted from 0 and the customer waiting demo command is missing, and (c) is a timing chart diagram showing a lamp effect different from the lamp effect shown in (b). be. (A) is a timing chart diagram showing the case where the number of start-holding balls is subtracted from 1 to 0 and the symbol stop command is not missing, and (b) is the start-holding number of balls from 1. It is a timing chart diagram showing the case where the number is subtracted to 0 and the symbol stop command is missing, and (c) is a timing chart diagram showing a lamp effect different from the lamp effect shown in (b). (A-1) to (a-2) show an example of a screen in which the number of start-holding balls is held and the special symbol is stopped from a state of high-speed fluctuation, and (a-3) is a start-holding. An example of a screen in which an animation of subtracting the number of balls from 3 to 2 is executed is shown. An example is shown, (a-5) shows a screen example when the start hold subtraction command for subtracting the number of start hold balls from 3 to 2 is missing, and (b-1) to (b-2) are start. A screen example is shown in which the special symbol stops from a state where the special symbol fluctuates at high speed in a state where the start hold subtraction command for subtracting the number of hold balls from 3 to 2 is missing. An example of a screen in which an animation of subtracting from one to one is executed is shown, (b-4) shows an example of a screen in which the number of start-holding balls is held by one, and (c-1) to (c-2). ) Shows an example of a screen in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 3 to 2, and the special symbol is stopped from a state where the special symbol is fluctuating at high speed in a state where the start hold subtraction command is missing, and (c-3) is a start hold ball. An example of a screen in which two numbers are held is shown, (c-4) shows an example of a screen in which an animation of subtracting the number of starting balls from two to one is executed, and (c-5) is a start holding. It is a figure which shows the screen example in which one sphere is held. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data arrangement of the game ROM according to the same embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the data arrangement of the game ROM, which is different from the data arrangement shown in (a). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a case where the data arrangement of the conventional game ROM is shown, and (b) is the case where the used area of the CG data storage area is reduced in the data arrangement of the game ROM shown in (a). It is explanatory drawing when the sound data stored in the sound data storage area of the game ROM which concerns on the same embodiment is transferred to the sound RAM. (A) shows the data arrangement when the control program storage area is added to the data arrangement shown in FIG. 14 (a) in the game ROM according to the same embodiment, and (b) shows the data arrangement in the same embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data arrangement when the control program storage area is added to the said game ROM in addition to the data arrangement shown in FIG. 14 (b). (A) to (c) are screen examples showing the conventional variable state in the decorative symbol and the resident symbol. (A) to (p) are screen examples showing from the start of change to the stop of change of the same embodiment in the decorative symbol and the resident symbol. It is a timing chart diagram which shows from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop of the same embodiment in a decorative symbol and a resident symbol. (A) shows the variation scenario selected in the same embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the processing contents of the variation scenario for the resident symbol shown in (a), and (c) is in (a). It is explanatory drawing explaining the processing content of the normal variation 12 seconds variation scenario for the decorative pattern shown. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display area predetermined for displaying the resident symbol on the liquid crystal display device, and (b-1) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the resident symbol change start sequence table L. , (B-2) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the resident symbol changing sequence table L, and (b-3) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the resident symbol fluctuation stop sequence table L, (c-). 1) is an explanatory diagram explaining the processing contents of the resident symbol change start sequence table C, (c-2) is an explanatory diagram explaining the processing contents of the resident symbol changing sequence table C, and (c-3) is an explanatory diagram. An explanatory diagram explaining the processing contents of the resident symbol change stop sequence table C, (d-1) is an explanatory diagram explaining the processing contents of the resident symbol change start sequence table R, and (d-2) is a resident symbol changing. An explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the sequence table R, (d-3) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the resident symbol fluctuation stop sequence table R. (A-1) to (d-1) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a scene predetermined for displaying the fluctuation of the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display device, and (a-2) to (d-2) are explanatory diagrams. An explanatory diagram for explaining a scene predetermined for displaying the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device, (a-3) is predetermined for displaying the stop of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing explaining the scene. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation start sequence table X, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, and (c) is the processing of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents, (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table X, and (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation stop sequence table X. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation start sequence table Y, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y, and (c) is the processing of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents, (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table Y, and (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation stop sequence table Y. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation start sequence table Z, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z, and (c) is the processing of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z. An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents, (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table Z, and (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the fluctuation stop sequence table Z. (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the decorative patterns 1 to 9, and (b-1) to (b-5) are the scenes shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to (d-1). It is explanatory drawing explaining the method of changing a decorative pattern. (A) to (n) are screen examples showing an example of variation in the decorative symbol and the resident symbol until the SP reach is started. It is a timing chart diagram which shows from the start of fluctuation in the middle decorative symbol to the start of SP reach. (A) shows a variation scenario selected for executing the variation example shown in FIG. 28, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing contents of the normal variation scenario for decorative symbols shown in (a), (c). ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the tempai time variation scenario for decorative symbols shown in (a), and (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the reach development time variation scenario for decorative symbols shown in (a). Is. (A) to (d) are explanatory diagrams illustrating a predetermined scene for displaying the fluctuation of the left and right decorative symbols at the time of reach development on the liquid crystal display device. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the tempai time variation sequence table Y, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the processing content of the reach development time sequence table X, and (c) is a reach development time sequence table. It is explanatory drawing explaining the processing content of Z. (A) shows the fluctuation scenario selected based on the fluctuation pattern command per SP reach, (b) shows the fluctuation scenario selected based on the fluctuation pattern command out of SP reach, and (c) shows the decoration. An explanatory diagram explaining the processing contents of the SP reach fluctuation scenario for symbols, (d) is an explanatory diagram explaining the processing contents of the display scenario per SP reach for decorative symbols, and (e) is an SP reach loss display scenario for decorative symbols. It is explanatory drawing explaining the processing content of. (A) to (c) are screen examples showing a state in which the resident symbol fluctuates at high speed and the decorative symbol does not start to fluctuate and fluctuates at high speed after being enlarged and displayed. It is a timing chart diagram of the left resident symbol and the left decorative symbol explaining the switching timing in the screen example shown in FIG. 34. It is a flowchart explaining the main process of the main control which concerns on the same embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the continuation of the main process of the main control shown in FIG. 36. It is a flowchart explaining the setting switching process shown in FIG. 36. It is a flowchart explaining the power supply abnormality check process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt process of the main control which concerns on the same embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary symbol processing shown in FIG. 40. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 40. It is a flowchart explaining the start opening check process 1 (2) shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart explaining the hit determination process shown in FIG. 44. It is a figure which shows the program example of the hit determination table. It is a figure which shows the program example of the hit determination table when there is only one set value. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special symbol change shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart explaining the process during the special symbol confirmation time shown in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart explaining the LED management process shown in FIG. 40. It is a figure which shows the program example of the LED common output selection table. It is a flowchart explaining the process outside the use area shown in FIG. 40. It is a flowchart explaining the LED update process outside the use area shown in FIG. 52. It is a figure which shows the program example when the common data is output from different ports. (A) shows a normal symbol hit determination table used when executing a normal symbol hit / fail lottery, and (b) shows a special symbol jackpot determination table used when executing a special symbol win / fail lottery. (C) is a figure which shows the special symbol small hit determination table used when executing the winning / failing lottery of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the sub control which concerns on the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the data analysis process shown in FIG. 56. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception process of the sub control which concerns on the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the sub control which concerns on the same embodiment. (A) is a flowchart for explaining an initial command list for moving images, (b) is a flowchart for explaining a stationary command list for moving images, and (c) is a flowchart for explaining a command list for still images. ..

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings, using a pachinko gaming machine as an example. In the following description, when the directions of up, down, left, and right are shown, it means up, down, left, and right when viewed from the front of the illustration.

<Explanation of the appearance configuration of pachinko game machines>
First, the appearance configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 6.

<Explanation of the appearance configuration of the front of the pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a wooden outer frame 2 and a hinge 4a (see FIG. 2) provided on the left side surface in front of the outer frame 2 around the vertical axis. It is provided with a rectangular front frame 3 that is pivotally attached so as to be openable and closable and detachable.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the front frame 3 includes an upper mounting portion 5 and a lower mounting portion 6 provided below the upper mounting portion 5. On the front side of the upper mounting portion 5, an upper opening / closing door 7 supporting transparent glass pivotally attached around the center of the vertical axis via the hinge 4a is provided, and the front side of the lower mounting portion 6 is provided. The lower opening / closing door 8 is pivotally attached to the lower opening / closing door 8 by a hinge 4b provided on the same side as the hinge 4a so as to be openable / closable and detachable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 1, the lower opening / closing door 8 has an upper tray 9 for storing the discharged game balls and a lower tray 9 for receiving and storing the surplus balls when the upper tray 9 is full. The saucer 10 is integrally formed. Further, the lower opening / closing door 8 is provided with a ball lending button 11 and a prepaid card ejection button 12 (card return button 12), and a built-in lamp (not shown) is lit on the upper plate surface portion of the upper tray 9. A push button type effect button device 13 that can change the effect effect by pressing the button occasionally is provided. Further, the upper saucer 9 is provided with a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper saucer 9 downward, and further, a setting button 15 composed of a substantially cross key is provided. The setting button 15 can be operated by the player, and has a circular decision key 15a provided in the center, a triangular upper key 15b provided on the upper side of the figure of the decision key 15a, and a determination thereof. A triangular left key 15c provided on the left side of the key 15a, a triangular right key 15d provided on the right side of the decision key 15a, and a triangular shape provided on the lower side of the decision key 15a. It is composed of a lower key 15e.

On the other hand, on the right end side of the lower opening / closing door 8, as shown in FIG. 1, a firing handle 16 for operating the firing unit is provided, and as shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, both upper sides of the front frame 3 are provided. A speaker 17 that emits a BGM (Background music) or a sound effect is provided on the surface side and in the vicinity of the launch handle 16. Decorative lamps such as LED lamps that bring out the effect of the decoration of light are arranged in various places of the upper opening / closing door 7 and the lower opening / closing door 8.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the upper mounting portion 5 is provided with a game board mounting frame 18, and the game board YB (see FIG. 1) is attached to the game board mounting frame 18 in FIG. The game area 40 shown is mounted so as to face the front surface, and is fixed in the game board mounting frame 18. That is, as shown in FIG. 3, since the upper mounting portion 5 is provided with a plurality of connection connectors 19 (4 in the drawing) at the lower part on the right side surface side, the game board YB is provided on these connection connectors 19. By connecting a connector for connection (not shown) provided on the back surface of the game board, the game board YB is mounted in the game board mounting frame 18. Then, the game board YB is fixed in the game board mounting frame 18 by the fixing tools 20a and 20b provided in the vertical direction on the right side surface side. As a result, the game board YB is mounted in the game board mounting frame 18, so that the upper opening / closing door 7 supporting the transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 40 of the game board YB (see FIG. 1). ). The gaming area 40 is composed of an area surrounded by a ball guide rail UR (see FIG. 5) arranged on the surface of the game board YB.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the lower mounting portion 6 has a firing mechanism 21 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and a speaker 17 is arranged on the right side of the firing mechanism 21. As shown in FIG. 3, the launch mechanism 21 includes a support plate 22 made of sheet metal, a launch rail 23 mounted on the front surface of the support plate 22, and a game ball mounted on the front surface of the support plate 22 for launching. A ball holding portion 25 that holds the ball at the launch standby position 24 on the launch rail 23, a hitting mallet 27 that is swingably supported around the drive shaft 26 in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the support plate 22, and the back side of the support plate 22. It is equipped with a launch control board 71 provided with a launch motor that is mounted on the batter and drives the striking mallet 27 in the striking direction via the drive shaft 26.

<Explanation of the appearance configuration of the game board>
On the other hand, in the game area 40 of the game board YB, as shown in FIG. 5, a liquid crystal display device 41 made of an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or the like is arranged in a substantially central portion. The liquid crystal display device 41 divides the display area into three areas, left, middle, and right, and can independently display numbers, characters, characters (character conversation, lyric telop, etc.) or special symbols. Is. Around such a liquid crystal display device 41, a decorative upper decoration 42a, a left decoration 42b, and a right decoration 42c are provided, and on the back side of the upper decoration 42a, the left decoration 42b, and the right decoration 42c. A movable accessory device 43 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 5, the movable accessory device 43 has an upper movable accessory 43a, a left movable accessory 43b, a right movable accessory 43c, and an upper left movable accessory that perform a predetermined effect operation as the game progresses. It is composed of an object 43d and a motor (not shown) such as a two-phase stepping motor that drives the upper, left, right, and upper left movable accessories 43a to 43d, respectively. Decorative lamps such as LED lamps that produce an effect by decorating the light are arranged on the upper, left, right, and upper left movable accessories 43a to 43d.

On the other hand, a special symbol 1 starting port 44 is arranged directly below the liquid crystal display device 41, and a special symbol 1 starting port switch 44a (see FIG. 6) for detecting a winning ball is provided inside the special symbol 1 starting port 44. Then, the number of effective winning balls detected by the special symbol 1 starting port switch 44a (see FIG. 6), that is, the number of first holding holding balls is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 as a predetermined number (for example, 4). .. The number of first reserved balls is incremented by 1 (+1) when a game ball wins a special symbol 1 starting port 44 and is detected by the special symbol 1 starting port switch 44a (see FIG. 6). When the variable display of a special symbol such as a number, a character, or a symbol (decorative symbol) is started, 1 subtraction (-1) is performed.

On the other hand, a special symbol 2 starting port 45 is arranged on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 41, and a special symbol 2 starting port switch 45a (see FIG. 6) for detecting a winning ball is provided inside the special symbol 2 starting port 45. Then, the number of effective winning balls detected by the special symbol 2 starting port switch 45a (see FIG. 6), that is, the number of second starting holding balls is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 as a predetermined number (for example, 4). .. The number of reserved balls for the second start is incremented by 1 (+1) when the game ball wins the special symbol 2 start port 45 and is detected by the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6). When the variable display of a special symbol such as a number, a character, or a symbol (decorative symbol) is started, 1 subtraction (-1) is performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, the special symbol 2 starting port 45 is provided with an opening / closing member 45b, and when the opening / closing member 45b is opened, the game ball is easily won. The opening / closing member 45b is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when a lottery for a normal symbol described later is won, and the opening / closing operation is controlled by a normal electric accessory solenoid 45c (see FIG. 6). In the following, a device combining such an opening / closing member 45b and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 45c may be referred to as an ordinary electric accessory.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, a winning device 46 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol 1 starting port 44. The winning device 46 opens and closes so that the large winning opening (not shown) closed by the opening / closing door 46a opens when the lottery of the special symbol described later is won, that is, in the special gaming state generated by the big hit. The door 46a is driven and controlled by the special electric accessory solenoid 46b (see FIG. 6), and the game ball can enter the large winning opening (not shown). The game ball that has entered the large winning opening (not shown) is detected as a winning ball by the large winning opening switch 46c (see FIG. 6) provided inside the large winning opening (not shown).

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery has not been won, that is, when the game is not in the special gaming state, the opening / closing door 46a is driven and controlled by the special electric accessory solenoid 46b (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening (not shown). Is closed. As a result, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening (not shown). In the following, a device combining such an opening / closing door 46a and a special electric accessory solenoid 46b may be referred to as a special electric accessory.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, a normal symbol start port 47 composed of a gate is arranged in the upper right portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, and inside the normal symbol start port switch 47a (which detects the passage of a game ball). (See FIG. 6) is provided. Further, general winning openings 48 are arranged on the right side of the winning device 46 and on the left side of the special symbol 1 starting port 44, respectively. The general winning opening 48 is the upper right general winning opening 48a arranged on the right side of the winning device 46, the upper left general winning opening 48b arranged on the left side of the special symbol 1 starting opening 44, and the left middle general winning opening 48b. It is composed of a mouth 48c and a lower left general winning mouth 48d. An upper right general winning opening switch 48a1 (see FIG. 6) for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided inside the upper right general winning opening 48a, and an upper left for detecting the passage of the game ball inside the upper left general winning opening 48b. A general winning opening switch 48b1 (see FIG. 6) is provided, and a left middle general winning opening switch 48c1 (see FIG. 6) for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided inside the left middle general winning opening 48c, and a lower left general winning opening switch 48c1 is provided. Inside the mouth 48d, a lower left general winning opening switch 48d1 (see FIG. 6) for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided.

On the other hand, directly below the special symbol 1 starting port 44, an out opening 49 is arranged in which a game ball (out ball) that has flowed down to the most downstream portion of the game area 40 without winning a prize is inserted. The game ball that has entered the out port 49 is detected by the out port switch 49a (see FIG. 6) provided inside as a non-winning ball, and the above-mentioned winning ball is also on the back side of the game board 4. Since it will flow down to the most downstream portion through it, it will be detected by the out port switch 49a (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the out port switch 49a (see FIG. 6) detects the total number of ejected outs, that is, the same number of game balls as the game balls launched into the game area 40 by the launch handle 16.

On the other hand, three 7-segments are arranged side by side in the lower right peripheral portion of the game area 40 of the game board 4, of which two 7-segments are the special symbol display device 50 and the other 7-segment display devices. 52a displays the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol, and the game state. As shown in FIG. 5, the special symbol display device 50 is composed of a special symbol 1 display device 50a and a special symbol 2 display device 50b, and one on the left side of the special symbol 1 display device 50a is one. A normal symbol display device 51 composed of LEDs is provided, and a round lamp 52b for notifying the number of rounds of the jackpot game and a right-handed notification lamp 52c for notifying right-handed hitting are further provided.

Further, an identification lamp device 50A showing identification information corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided on the upper end side of the left decoration 43b.

In this identification lamp device 50A, the first and second identification lamps 50Aa and 50Ab for notifying the player of the information of the hit loss of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 being changed or the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 being lost. have. The first identification lamp 50Aa corresponds to the special symbol 1, and the second identification lamp 50Ab corresponds to the special symbol 2. Then, when the special symbol 1 is changing, the first identification lamp 50Aa blinks, when the special symbol 1 hits, the first identification lamp 50Aa lights up, and when the special symbol 1 is lost, the first identification lamp 50Aa Turns off. Further, when the special symbol 2 is changing, the second identification lamp 50Ab blinks, when the special symbol 2 is a hit, the second identification lamp 50Ab is lit, and when the special symbol 2 is lost, the second identification lamp is a second identification lamp. 50Ab is to be turned off.

Although not shown, a plurality of game nails are arranged in the game area 40 of the game board 4, and a windmill 53 as a falling direction changing member of the game ball is arranged.

<Explanation of the appearance configuration of the back of the pachinko machine>
Thus, as shown in FIG. 4, the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above is provided with a frame-shaped back mechanism plate 54 that covers the gaming board mounting frame 18 and presses the gaming board YB from the back side. There is. A game ball storage tank 55 for storing game balls supplied from a game ball supply device (not shown) of the pachinko hall side island facility is provided on the upper right side of the back mechanism plate 54, and further. A tank rail 56 for leading out a ball from the game ball storage tank 55 is provided.

A payout device 57 and a payout passage 58 are attached to the lower end of the inclination of the tank rail 56, and when a game ball wins a prize in a winning opening such as a large winning opening (not shown), or a game ball lending device. When there is a ball lending command from (not shown), the game ball in the game ball storage tank 55 is paid out by the payout device 57 via the tank rail 56, and the game ball is paid out through the payout passage 58 to the upper tray 9 (not shown). (See Fig. 1).

Further, a transparent back cover 59 (see also FIG. 3) detachably attached to the back side of the game board YB is mounted in the substantially center of the back mechanism plate 54, and a sub is mounted in the back cover 59. A transparent sub-control board case 80a containing the control board 80 is detachably provided. A transparent main control board case 60a containing the main control board 60 is detachably provided below the sub control board case 80a, and the payout control board 70 is below the main control board case 60a. A transparent payout control board case 70a containing the above is detachably provided. Further, below the main control board case 60a, a power supply board case 130a containing the power supply board 130 is detachably provided.

<Explanation of control device>
Next, a control device for electronically controlling according to the progress of the game provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the appearance configuration as described above will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, this control device includes a main control board 60 that controls overall game operation, a payout control board 70 that pays out game balls based on control commands from the main control board 60, and an image. It is mainly composed of a sub control board 80 that controls light and sound.

<Explanation of main control board>
The main control board 60 is a one-chip microcomputer composed of a main control CPU 600a, a main control ROM 600b that stores a game program or the like that describes a series of game control procedures, and a main control RAM 600c that functions as a work area, a buffer memory, or the like. Display (performance display) of the computer 600 and the ratio of how many prize balls were won at the time of low probability (normal low probability state of winning lottery), and generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player. It is mainly equipped with a measurement / setting display device 610 consisting of 7 segments that also display the probability setting contents, a RAM clear switch 620, and a setting key switch 630.

A payout control board 70 that controls the payout motor M to pay out the game ball is connected to the main control board 60 configured in this way. Further, a special symbol 1 starting port switch 44a for detecting a prize in the special symbol 1 starting port 44, a special symbol 2 starting port switch 45a for detecting a winning in the special symbol 2 starting port 45, and a normal symbol starting port 45a. The normal symbol start port switch 47a that detects the passage of 47 and the general winning opening 48 (upper right general winning opening 48a, upper left general winning opening 48b, left middle general winning opening 48c, lower left general winning opening 48d) are detected. Upper right general winning opening switch 48a1, upper left general winning opening switch 48b1, left middle general winning opening switch 48c1, lower left general winning opening switch 48d1, and large winning opening (not shown) opened or closed by the opening / closing door 46a. The large winning opening switch 46c to be detected and the out opening switch 49a capable of detecting the same number of gaming balls as the gaming balls launched into the gaming area 40 by the firing handle 16 are connected. Furthermore, a normal electric accessory solenoid 45c that controls the operation of the opening / closing member 45b, a special electric accessory solenoid 46b that controls the operation of the opening / closing door 46a, a special symbol 1 display device 50a, and a special symbol 2 display device 50b. , The normal symbol display device 51, the 7-segment display device 52a, the round lamp 52b, and the right-handed notification lamp 52c are connected.

When the main control board 60 configured in this way receives a signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 44a, the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a, or the normal symbol start port switch 47a by the main control CPU 600a, it is advantageous for the player. A lottery is performed to determine whether a special gaming state is generated (so-called "hit") or a special gaming state advantageous to the player is not generated (so-called "missing"), and the result of the lottery is based on the winning / failing information. The display contents of the variation pattern, the stop symbol, or the normal symbol of the special symbol are determined, and the determined information is transmitted to the special symbol 1 display device 50a, the special symbol 2 display device 50b, or the ordinary symbol display device 51. As a result, the lottery result is displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 50a, the special symbol 2 display device 50b, or the normal symbol display device 51. Further, the main control board 60, that is, the main control CPU 600a, generates an effect control command DI_CMD including the determined information and transmits it to the sub control board 80. The main control board 60, that is, the main control CPU 600a, has a special symbol 1 start port switch 44a, a special symbol 2 start port switch 45a, an upper right general winning opening switch 48a1, an upper left general winning opening switch 48b1, and a left middle general winning opening switch. When a signal is received from 48c1, the lower left general winning opening switch 48d1, and the large winning opening switch 46c, it is decided how much game ball to be paid out to the player, and the payout control command PAY_CMD including the decided information is paid out. By transmitting to the control board 70, the payout control board 70 pays out the game ball to the player.

Further, as a result of the lottery, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is won, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 45c is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing member 45b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the lottery of the special symbol is won. The special electric accessory solenoid 46b is controlled to open the large winning opening (not shown).

On the other hand, the main control board 60, that is, the main control CPU 600a, has a special symbol 1 start port switch 44a, a special symbol 2 start port switch 45a, an upper right general winning opening switch 48a1, an upper left general winning opening switch 48b1, and a left middle general winning opening switch. The number of prize balls is measured each time a signal is received from 48c1, the lower left general winning opening switch 48d1, and the large winning opening switch 46c, and the total number of game balls ejected each time the signal from the out opening switch 49a is received. To measure. Then, the main control board 60, that is, the main control CPU 600a, based on the measured number of prize balls and the total number of ejected game balls, describes the content (performance display) regarding the ratio of how many prize balls were awarded at the time of low accuracy. Output to the measurement / setting display device 610. As a result, the content (performance display) relating to the ratio of how many prize balls were awarded at the time of low accuracy is displayed on the measurement / setting display device 610.

Further, the measurement / setting display device 610 can display, for example, the setting contents of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player in six stages of "1" to "6". .. Then, when changing such a setting content, when a dedicated key is inserted into the setting key switch 630 and turned on, the probability that the RAM clear switch 620 will generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player. The setting contents can be changed in 6 stages of, for example, "1" to "6" (for example, the setting "6" has the highest probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player. , The setting "1" has the lowest probability of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player). Then, the setting change content is displayed on the measurement / setting display device 610, and when the setting change content is confirmed, the dot on the lower right side of the 7-segment lights up to indicate that the setting content has been confirmed. It has become.

The measurement / setting display device 610 will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 7, the measurement / setting display device 610 is connected to the signals output from the LED drivers 611a to 611c. The LED drivers 611a to 611c include a special symbol display device 50 (see FIG. 5), a normal symbol display device 51 (see FIG. 5), a 7-segment display device 52a, a round lamp 52b, a right-handed notification lamp 52c, and four 7-segments. Which of the measurement / setting display devices 610 configured by is to be turned on is selected, and a signal is output. More specifically, the LED driver 611a receives the 8-bit data signal output from the one-chip microcomputer 600 shown in FIG. 6 as the 8-bit data signal 611a1 and receives the 4-bit first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2. , Special symbol display device 50 (see FIG. 5), or ordinary symbol display device 51 (see FIG. 5), or 7-segment display device 52a (see FIG. 5), or round lamp 52b (see FIG. 5), or. , The right-handed notification lamp 52c (see FIG. 5) is output, and the 4-bit second LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a3 is output to the measurement / setting display device 610. That is, the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2 output from the LED driver 611a is common data for selecting an LED that receives the first LED dynamic lighting data signal 611b2 output from the LED driver 611b described later. The 4-bit first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2 includes a 1-bit first LED dynamic lighting common data first signal 611a2a, a 1-bit first LED dynamic lighting common data second signal 611a2b, and a 1-bit first LED dynamic. It is composed of a lighting common data third signal 611a2c and a 1-bit first LED dynamic lighting common data fourth signal 611a2d.

Further, the second LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a3 output from the LED driver 611a is common data for selecting an LED that receives the second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2 output from the LED driver 611c described later. The 4-bit second LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a3 includes a 1-bit second LED dynamic lighting common data first signal 611a3a, a 1-bit second LED dynamic lighting common data second signal 611a3b, and a 1-bit second LED dynamic. It is composed of a lighting common data third signal 611a3c and a 1-bit second LED dynamic lighting common data fourth signal 611a3d, and the second LED dynamic lighting common data first signal 611a3a is among the measurement / setting display devices 610. Output to the first measurement / setting display device 610A located on the right side of the figure, and the second LED dynamic lighting common data second signal 611a3b is the left side of the measurement / setting display device 610 of the first measurement / setting display device 610A. It is output to the second measurement / setting display device 610B located in, and the second LED dynamic lighting common data third signal 611a3c is located on the left side of the measurement / setting display device 610 of the second measurement / setting display device 610B. The second LED dynamic lighting common data 4th signal 611a3d is output to the third measurement / setting display device 610C, and is located on the left side of the figure of the third measurement / setting display device 610C among the measurement display devices 610. It is output to the measurement / setting display device 610D.

On the other hand, the LED driver 611b receives the 8-bit data signal output from the one-chip computer 600 shown in FIG. 6 as the 8-bit data signal 611b1, and receives the first LED dynamic lighting data signal 611b2 as the special symbol display device 50 ( (See FIG. 5), or ordinary symbol display device 51 (see FIG. 5), 7-segment display device 52a (see FIG. 5), round lamp 52b (see FIG. 5), or right-handed notification lamp 52c (see FIG. 5). It is output in FIG. 5). As a result, the lottery result is displayed on the special symbol display device 50, the lottery result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 51, or the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, or the normal symbol 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display device 52a. The number of start-holding balls and the game status of the symbol are displayed, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on the round lamp 52b, or the right-handed notification is displayed on the right-handed notification lamp 52c. .. As shown in FIG. 7, damping resistors R53 to R46 are connected to the first LED dynamic lighting data signal 611b2, and a system generated by the system reset generation unit 1320 (see FIG. 6) is connected to the LED driver 611b. The reset signal RST is input. Further, a capacitor C40 is provided between the wiring pattern of the voltage input to the LED driver 611b and the wiring pattern of the ground.

On the other hand, the LED driver 611c receives the 8-bit data signal output from the one-chip computer 600 shown in FIG. 6 as the 8-bit data signal 611c1, and measures and sets the 8-bit second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2. It is output to the display device 610. As a result, when displaying the content (performance display) related to the ratio of how many prize balls were won at the time of low accuracy, the first measurement / setting display device 610A, the second measurement / setting display device 610B, and the third The contents are displayed on all of the measurement / setting display device 610C and the fourth measurement / setting display device 610D. On the other hand, when displaying the setting content of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the setting content is displayed only on the first measurement / setting display device 610A. As shown in FIG. 7, damping resistors R3 to R10 are connected to the second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2, and a system generated by the system reset generation unit 1320 (see FIG. 6) is connected to the LED driver 611c. The reset signal RST is input. Further, a capacitor C2 is provided between the wiring pattern of the voltage input to the LED driver 611c and the wiring pattern of the ground.

Thus, in this way, the measurement / setting display device 610 displays the content (performance display) relating to the ratio of how many prize balls were awarded at the time of low accuracy, and the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player. It will also be used to display the setting contents of.

On the other hand, the RAM clear switch 620 clears all the memory area of the main control RAM 600c (see FIG. 6) when the RAM clear switch 620 is pressed except when the dedicated key is inserted into the setting key switch 630 and turned on. Instead, only a part of the memory area is cleared. That is, as shown in FIG. 8A, in the main control RAM 600c, of the memory space addresses 0000H to 0200H, the memory space addresses 0000H to 0100H are work areas and the like during game processing such as lottery processing. In the normal RAM area 600ca used as, the memory space addresses 0100H to 0110H are used in the unused area 600cc, and the memory space addresses 0110H to 0130H are used in the game processing such as lottery processing. In the stack area 600cc, the memory space addresses 0130H to 0150H are in the unused area 600cd, and the memory space addresses 0150H to 0190H are the prize balls measured by the main control board 60, that is, the main control CPU 600. In the measurement RAM area 600ce that stores the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the number and the number of non-winnings, the memory space addresses 0190H to 01E0H are unused areas 600cf and the memory space address 01E0H. The address 0200H is composed of a measurement stack area of 600 cg used when measuring the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the number of prize balls and the number of non-winning balls.

Thus, in the main control RAM 600c configured in this way, when the RAM clear switch 620 is pressed, the measurement RAM area 600ce and the measurement stack area 600cg of the main control RAM 600c are not cleared, and the normal RAM area 600ca, normal The stack area 600cc is cleared. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the measured number of prize balls and the number of non-winning balls is erroneously cleared. In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 620 is pressed, the normal RAM area 600ca and the normal stack area 600cc are cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the unused areas 600cc and 600cd are used. Including, the memory space addresses from 0000H to 0150H may be cleared.

Further, each area of the normal RAM area 600ca, the normal stack area 600cc, the measurement RAM area 600ce, and the measurement stack area 600cc starts from the address where the last digit starts from 0, and the normal RAM area 600ca and the normal stack are started. An unused area 600cc is provided between the area 600cc, an unused area 600cd is provided between the normal stack area 600cc and the measurement RAM area 600ce, and the measurement RAM area 600ce and the measurement stack area 600cc are further provided. By providing an unused area 600 cf between the and, the area is distinguished from each other. This makes it possible to prevent other areas from being affected when the program goes out of control.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the main control ROM 600b, among the memory space addresses 8000H to A800H, the memory space addresses 8000H to 8B90H are programs used during game processing such as lottery processing. In the normal program area 600ba where is stored, the memory space addresses 8B90H to 9000H are used, and in the unused area 600bb, the memory space addresses 9000H to 9000H are used during game processing such as lottery processing. In the normal data area 600bc where data is stored, the memory space addresses 9A00H to 9C00H are unused areas 600bd, and the memory space addresses 9C00H to A010H include the number of prize balls and the number of non-winners. In the measurement program area 600be in which the program used for measuring the total number of game balls launched in the game area 40 is stored, the memory space addresses A010H to A200H are in the unused area 600bf. The memory space addresses A200H to A320H are measurement data areas in which data used for measuring the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the number of prize balls and the number of non-winning balls are stored. At 600 bg, the memory space addresses A320H to A780H are unused areas 600 bh, and the memory space addresses A780H to A800H are composed of the vector table area 600 bi.

The main control RAM 600c configured in this way has the last digit of each area of the normal program area 600ba, the normal data area 600bc, the measurement program area 600be, the measurement data area 600bg, and the vector table area 600bi. Starting from an address starting from 0, an unused area 600bb is provided between the normal program area 600ba and the normal data area 600bc, and an unused area is provided between the normal data area 600bc and the measurement program area 600be. An unused area 600bf is provided between the measurement program area 600be and the measurement data area 600bg, and an unused area 600bh is further provided between the measurement data area 600bg and the vector table area 600bi. By providing it, it is possible to make a distinction for each area. This makes it possible to prevent other areas from being affected when the program goes out of control.

<Explanation of payout control board>
The payout control board 70 receives the payout control command PAY_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), and generates a payout motor signal based on the received payout control command PAY_CMD. Then, the payout motor M is controlled by the generated payout motor signal, and the game ball is paid out to the player. Further, the payout control board 70 transmits a prize ball counting signal indicating a payout operation of the game ball and a status signal related to an abnormality in the payout operation, and launches the game ball in response to the player's operation. Performs a process of transmitting a firing control signal to start or stop the operation of.

<Explanation of sub-control board>
The sub-control board 80 receives the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) to execute and control various effects, and also controls the display image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 with the sub-control CPU 800a. , A sub-one-chip microcomputer composed of a sub-control ROM 800b that stores a control program that describes an effect control procedure and an effect scenario table PR_TBL shown in FIG. 9, and a sub-control RAM 800c that functions as a work area, a buffer memory, or the like. It is equipped with 800. The sub-control CPU 800a is provided with a DMA controller 800a1 that transfers sound data stored in the game ROM 805, which will be described later, to the sound RAM 802.

Further, the sub control board 80 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the instructions of the sound LSI 801 that generates a desired BGM and sound effect, the sound RAM 802 that functions as a work area, a buffer memory, and the like, and the sub one-chip microcomputer 800. DDR2 SDRAM 804 composed of VDP 803 for generating image data to be generated, a work area for decompressing moving image compressed data, and a frame buffer area for temporarily storing image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and still image compression. A game ROM 805 in which CG data of data and moving image compression data and sound data such as BGM and sound effects are stored in advance is installed. The still image is a so-called sprite image, and shows a single image such as text data such as characters, a background image, or a special pattern. Further, the moving image means a set of a plurality of continuously changing still images (for a plurality of frames), and a plurality of still images are continuously drawn on the liquid crystal display device 41 for smooth operation. Is reproduced.

A decorative lamp board 90 on which a decorative lamp such as an LED lamp that exhibits a lamp effect is mounted is connected to the sub-control board 80 configured in this way, and a built-in lamp (not shown) is further connected. ) A push-button type effect button device 13 that can change the effect by being pressed by the player during lighting is connected, and a speaker 17 that emits a BGM, a sound effect, or the like is connected. Further, a movable accessory device 43 that performs a predetermined effect operation as the game progresses is connected to the sub control board 80, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are being changed, or the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol are being changed. An identification lamp device 50A for notifying the player of the hit loss information of 2 is connected, a setting button 15 capable of various settings is connected, and a liquid crystal display device 41 is connected. Needless to say, the decorative lamp substrate 90 is also equipped with decorative lamps arranged on the upper, left, right, and upper left movable accessories 43a to 43d.

Thus, the sub-control board 80 configured in this way has a special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot lottery result (whether jackpot or loss) transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the current gaming state, and the start. The sub-control CPU 800a receives the effect control command DI_CMD containing the basic information necessary for the number of reserved balls, the decorative symbol to be stopped based on the lottery result, and the like. Then, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and executes the determined effect pattern. The control signal to be instructed is temporarily stored in the sub control RAM 800c.

The sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal related to sound among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the sound LSI 801. In response to this, the sound LSI 801 reads the sound data corresponding to the control signal from the game ROM 805 or the sound RAM 802 and outputs it to the speaker 17. As a result, the BGM and sound effects corresponding to the above-determined effect pattern are emitted from the speaker 17.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal related to light among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 controls to turn on or off the decorative lamp such as the LED lamp that exerts the lamp effect effect, so that the lamp effect corresponding to the above-determined effect pattern is executed. ..

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to the image to the VDP 803 among the control signals for instructing the execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image data to the liquid crystal display device 41 to obtain an image corresponding to the above-determined effect pattern. It will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal related to the movable accessory among the control signals for instructing the execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the movable accessory device 43. As a result, the movable accessory device 43 is movable in accordance with the above-determined effect pattern.

<Explanation of the production scenario table>
Here, the effect scenario table PR_TBL stored in the sub-control ROM 800b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, the effect scenario table PR_TBL stores a plurality of effect scenario data PS_DATA corresponding to the effect patterns determined by the sub-control CPU 800a. In this effect scenario data PS_DATA, a plurality of 1-layer data PS_DATA1 which are data for each layer used when drawing image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 are stored. As shown in FIG. 9B, the one-layer data PS_DATA1 shows the frame data PS_DATA10 for drawing 1 to 10 frames, the control code data PS_DATA11, and the position when the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the data. Coordinate data PS_DATA12, pixel calculation data PS_DATA13 such as image deformation, enlargement, reduction, and transparency, and enlargement / reduction data PS_DATA14 indicating image enlargement / reduction are stored. Further, the sound data PS_DATA15 indicating the sound emitted from the speaker 17, the movable accessory data PS_DATA16 for moving the movable accessory device 43, and the decorative lamp such as the LED lamp that exhibits the lamp effect are turned on or turned on. The lamp data PS_DATA17 for turning off the lamp is stored.

Further, the control code data PS_DATA11 stores the address address of the sub-control ROM 800b in which the control table CH_TBL shown in FIG. 9C is stored, and the data of the contents shown in the address address is referred to. .. That is, as shown in FIG. 9C, the control table CH_TBL stores a plurality of character data CH_DATA, and the character data CH_DATA includes data PS_DATA110 indicating whether it is a still image or a moving image, and game ROM 805. The address data PS_DATA111 indicating the address address, the image size data PS_DATA112 indicating the image size, the button data PS_DATA113 indicating the validity / invalidity of the continuous hitting effect of the setting button 15 or the pressing effect of the effect button device 13, and the movable accessory device 43. The movable accessory timing data PS_DATA114, which indicates the timing at which the movement of the moving object is started, is stored. As a result, the control code data PS_DATA 11 refers to one character data CH_DATA from the plurality of character data CH_DATA stored in the control table CH_TBL shown in FIG. 9 (c). The one-layer data PS_DATA1 stored in the effect scenario data PS_DATA is stored in order from the one with the lowest priority, and a moving image is displayed from the control table CH_TBL shown in FIG. 9 (c) at the position where the priority is lower. The control code data PS_DATA11 such that the data PS_DATA110 is referred to is stored, and the control code data such that the data PS_DATA110 indicating a still image is referred to from the control table CH_TBL shown in FIG. 9C at a position having a high priority. PS_DATA11 is stored.

<Explanation of VDP>
On the other hand, the VDP 803 that generates the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is configured as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the VDP 803 includes an interface circuit (I / F) 8030 for the DDR2 SDRAM 804, an interface circuit (I / F) 8031 for the game ROM 805, and an interface circuit (I / F) for the sub-one chip microcomputer 800. ) 8032 and is built-in. Further, the VDP 803 has a system control register 8033 accessed from the sub one-chip microcomputer 800 (sub control CPU 800a) via the interface circuit (I / F) 8032, a command memory 8034 for storing the command list, and a command list. A command parser 8035 to analyze, a CG memory controller 8036 to control the reading of data in the game ROM 805, a still image decoder 8037 to decode still image compressed data, a moving image decoder 8038 to decode moving image compressed data, and a still image decoder. The image decoded (expanded) by the 8037 and the moving image decoder 8038 is displayed on the geometry engine 8039, the built-in VRAM 8040, and the liquid crystal display device 41, which perform affine conversion and projection conversion such as enlargement / reduction / rotation / movement. Image data generated by the rendering engine 8041 to the rendering engine 8041 that generates the image data, the DDR2 SDRAM controller 8042 that controls the reading of the data in the DDR2 SDRAM 804 and the writing of the data into the DDR2 SDRAM 804, and the liquid crystal display device 41. It is composed of a display controller 8043 that controls the timing of displaying the data, and an LVDS transmission unit 8044 that transmits image data in the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) format when transmitting the image data to the liquid crystal display device 41.

The system control register 8033 is a register group in which the sub-one-chip microcomputer 800 (sub-control CPU 800a) writes instruction data for the VDP 803, and a register in which the sub-one-chip microcomputer 800 (sub-control CPU 800a) reads information indicating the operating state of the VDP 803. It is roughly divided into groups. As a result, the sub-one-chip microcomputer 800 (sub-control CPU 800a) operates the VDP 803 appropriately by writing the necessary setting value to the predetermined input register, and operates the VDP 803 by referring to the value of the necessary output register. It becomes possible to grasp the state.

On the other hand, the command memory 8034 stores a command list, and this command list is transmitted from the sub-one-chip microcomputer 800 (sub-control CPU 800a) via the interface circuit (I / F) 8032. .. More specifically, the sub-one-chip microcomputer 800 (sub-control CPU 800a) stores in advance the effect pattern corresponding to the effect control command DI_CMD received by the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) in the sub-control ROM 800b. It is determined by lottery from a large number of produced effect patterns, a command list is created based on the determined effect pattern, and the command list is transmitted to the command memory 8034 via the interface circuit (I / F) 8032. In response to this, the command memory 8034 stores the command list.

On the other hand, the command parser 8035 analyzes the command list stored in the command memory 8034, and the command list analysis executes the drawing operation every frame. That is, the still image decoder 8037 is stationary from the address address of the game ROM 805 shown in the address data PS_DATA111 (see FIG. 9C) using the CG memory controller 8036 based on the analysis result of the command list by the command parser 8035. The image compressed data is read, and the read still image compressed data is decoded (decompressed). Then, the decoded still image data is temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM8040.

On the other hand, the moving image decoder 8038 uses the CG memory controller 8036 to compress the moving image from the address address of the game ROM 805 shown in the address data PS_DATA111 (see FIG. 9C) based on the analysis result of the command list by the command parser 8035. The data is read, and the read video compressed data is decoded (decompressed). Then, the decoded moving image data is temporarily stored in the DDR2 SDRAM 804.

The still images and moving images (moving images for one frame) decoded in this way are the analysis results of the command list by the command parser 8035, that is, various data (frame data PS_DATA10, shown in FIG. 9B). Based on the coordinate data PS_DATA12, pixel calculation data PS_DATA13, scaling data PS_DATA14), the geometry engine 8039 has performed affine conversion such as enlargement / reduction / rotation / movement and projection conversion, and the processing has been performed. The image data is stored in the built-in VRAM8040, and the moving image data is stored in the DDR2 SDRAM 804.

After that, the rendering engine 8041 functions, the moving image data stored in the DDR2 SDRAM 804 is read by the DDR2 SDRAM controller 8042, and the moving image data is drawn by the rendering engine 8041. Next, the still image data is read from the built-in VRAM 8040, and the still image data is drawn. As a result, the still image data is overwritten and drawn on the moving image data, so that the image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is generated. The generated image data is written in the frame buffer area in the DDR2 SDRAM 804 by the DDR2 SDRAM controller 8042.

Thus, the image data written in the frame buffer area is read from the DDR2 SDRAM controller 8042 by the display controller 8043 and transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41 by the LVDS transmission unit 8044. As a result, the image data generated by the rendering engine 8041 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

By the way, the image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is updated every frame, and the figure is made so that the sub-one-chip microcomputer 800 (sub-control CPU 800a) can grasp that the display operation of this one frame is completed. 6. The VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) shown in FIG. 10 is transmitted from the VDP 803 to the sub-control CPU 800a as an interrupt signal. As a result, the sub-control CPU 800a can grasp that the image data for one frame is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The VSYNC interrupt signal is set to be generated every 33 ms, for example.

<Explanation of power supply board>
By the way, the power supply to each of the above-described boards is supplied from the power supply board 130 shown in FIG. The power supply board 130 includes a voltage generation unit 1300, a voltage monitoring unit 1310, and a system reset generation unit 1320. The voltage generation unit 1300 receives an AC voltage AC24V, which is an external power supply supplied from a transformer (not shown) installed in a game store, and generates a plurality of types of DC voltage. Although not shown, it is supplied to each substrate.

Further, the voltage monitoring unit 1310 monitors the voltage of the AC voltage AC24V, and when this voltage is cut off or a power failure occurs and a voltage abnormality is detected, the voltage abnormality signal ALARM is used as the main control board 60. It is output to. The voltage abnormality signal ALARM outputs an "L" level signal when the voltage is abnormal, and outputs an "H" level signal when the voltage is normal.

On the other hand, the system reset generation unit 1320 generates a system reset signal RST when the power is turned on, and the generated system reset signal RST is output to each board.

<Explanation about missing customer waiting demo command>
Here, with reference to FIG. 11, when the sub-control CPU 800a cannot receive the effect control command DI_CMD, which is a customer waiting demo command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) (see FIG. 6). I will explain it.

At the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11A, a start hold subtraction command (for example, B001H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 1 to 0 as an effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a). , The variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol), and the symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating the decoration symbol (special symbol) (for example, loss pattern). ) Is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c.

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a relates to the sound among the control signals to be executed in response to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The control signal is transmitted to the sound LSI 801. In response to this, the sound LSI 801 reads the sound data corresponding to the control signal from the game ROM 805 or the sound RAM 802 and outputs it to the speaker 17. As a result, the BGM corresponding to the above-determined effect pattern is emitted from the speaker 17. At this time, if the BGM has already been reproduced in the sound LSI 801 it will be reproduced as it is, and if the BGM has not been reproduced, it will be reproduced.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a is related to light among the control signals to be executed in response to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The control signal is transmitted to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 controls to turn on or off the decorative lamp such as the LED lamp that exerts the lamp effect effect, so that the variable lamp effect is executed.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a is an image (of the control signals to be instructed to be executed corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, or image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The command list related to (video) is transmitted to VDP803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, so that the variable video is liquid crystal. It will be displayed on the display device 41.

Next, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11A, a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) is sub-controlled by the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as the effect control command DI_CMD. It is transmitted to the CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a temporarily stores in the sub-control RAM 800c a control signal instructing execution of the effect pattern for stopping the effect pattern determined at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a). As a result, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to an image (video) among the control signals for instructing the execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the VDP 803. In response to this, the VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41 to obtain a decorative design (decorative pattern (video). An image in which the fluctuation of the special symbol) has stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The BGM being reproduced by the sound LSI 801 is continuously reproduced as it is, and the variable lamp effect executed by the sub-control CPU 800a is continuously executed as it is.

Next, when the number of start-holding balls is 0 and the change of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is in the standby state, the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11A. ) As the effect control command DI_CMD, a customer waiting demo command (for example, B401H) is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a temporarily stores in the sub-control RAM 800c a control signal instructing execution of the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD (customer waiting demo command).

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal related to sound among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the sound LSI 801. In response to this, the sound LSI 801 fades out the volume of the BGM being reproduced and puts it in a mute state. As a result, BGM cannot be emitted from the speaker 17. The mute state means that the volume is "0" or the volume is difficult for the player to recognize.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal related to light among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 controls to turn on or off the decorative lamp such as the LED lamp that exerts the lamp effect effect, so that the customer waiting demonstration lamp effect is executed.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to an image (video) among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the VDP 803. As a result, the VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, so that the customer waiting demo movie can be displayed. It will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, in this way, the gaming state shifts to the customer waiting demo state, triggered by the customer waiting demo command.

Of the three, 1) the volume of the BGM being played is faded out and muted, 2) the lamp effect for the customer waiting demo is executed, and 3) the customer waiting demo movie is displayed. At least one may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 60 seconds after) after receiving the customer waiting demo command. By doing so, the game ball wins a prize (special symbol 1 starting port) to the special symbol 1 starting port 44 (see FIG. 5) or the special symbol 2 starting port 45 (see FIG. 5) while the player is playing. If the variable stop state continues for a long time without being detected by the switch 44a (see FIG. 6) or the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6), at least one of the above 1) to 3) is rowed. If this happens, it will give the player the impression that the adjustment of the game nail (not shown) is bad, and will give the player an impression that it is disadvantageous to the game hall (hall) side. .. Therefore, as described above, by keeping a certain amount of time from the suspension of fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a bad impression.

By the way, although the customer waiting demo command is transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as the effect control command DI_CMD, the customer waiting demo command cannot be received by the sub control CPU 800a due to the influence of noise or the like. That is, if it is missing, the game state cannot be changed to the customer waiting demo state. Therefore, in the past, in order to notify that the gaming state cannot shift to the customer waiting demo state, an error display such as "command reception error" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

However, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received, it can operate as a gaming machine if the subsequent commands can be received, so if an error display such as "command reception error" is displayed, the player will be able to play the game. There was a problem that it became an obstacle and unnaturalness remained for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11B, noise and the like are transmitted even though the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a). If the customer waiting demo command cannot be received by the sub-control CPU 800a, that is, if it is missing, the liquid crystal display device 41 is prevented from displaying a "command reception error". As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural.

However, by that alone, it is not possible to notify the employees of the amusement park that an error has occurred. Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41, the following processing is performed.

That is, assuming that the customer waiting demo command could not be received, the sound LSI 801 does not end the BGM reproduced from the beginning to the end as it is, but reproduces the BGM in a loop. Specifically, at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11B, the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 1 to 0 as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a). A command (for example, B001H), a variation pattern of a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern 1), a variation pattern command (for example, A001H), and a symbol for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern). A designated command (for example, BB01H) is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a is a sound among the control signals to be instructed to be executed corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The control signal related to the above is transmitted to the sound LSI801. In response to this, the sound LSI 801 loops the BGM regardless of the fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) of the decorative symbol (special symbol).

Further, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11B, a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) is subordinated as an effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a). It is transmitted to the control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a temporarily stores in the sub-control RAM 800c a control signal instructing execution of the effect pattern for stopping the effect pattern determined at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11 (b). At this time, the sound LSI 801 does not stop the BGM being loop-reproduced, but loop-reproduces it as it is.

Thus, at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11B, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing), the BGM continues to be played back in a loop. Therefore, as the BGM continues to be played in a loop, a command reception error is sent to an employee of the amusement park who understands the error specifications without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41. Can be notified that has occurred.

By the way, in a state where the customer waiting demo command cannot be received and the BGM continues to be played in a loop, a game ball wins a prize in the special symbol 1 starting port 44 (see FIG. 5) or the special symbol 2 starting port 45 (see FIG. 5). (Detected by the special symbol 1 start port switch 44a (see FIG. 6) or the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 7)), the main control board 60 (main control) at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11 (b). From the CPU 600a), as the effect control command DI_CMD, the variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, the loss pattern 1) and the designation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, the loss pattern) are specified. The symbol designation command to be performed (for example, BB01H) is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a is a sound among the control signals to be instructed to be executed corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The control signal related to the above is transmitted to the sound LSI801. In response to this, the sound LSI 801 does not reproduce a new BGM, but reproduces the loop-reproduced BGM as it is. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without any discomfort.

On the other hand, at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11B, the start hold subtraction command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as the effect control command DI_CMD is used to subtract the number of start hold balls from 1 to 0. (For example, B001H), a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of a variation pattern (for example, a loss pattern 1) of a decorative symbol (special symbol), a symbol designation for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern). When a command (for example, BB01H) is received by the sub-control CPU 800a, it is executed corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a sound, light, or an image (video) of an effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. Among the control signals to be instructed, the control signal related to light is transmitted to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 controls to turn on or off the decorative lamp such as the LED lamp that exerts the lamp effect, so that the decorative symbol (special symbol) is affected by the fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds). Instead, the variable lamp effect will be executed in a loop.

Further, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11B, a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) transmitted as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a). Is received by the sub-control CPU 800a, among the control signals for instructing execution corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. , A control signal regarding light is transmitted to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 does not stop the variable lamp effect that is being executed in a loop, but is executed in a loop as it is.

Thus, at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11B, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing), the variable lamp effect continues to be executed in a loop. Therefore, by continuing to execute the variable lamp effect in a loop, employees of the amusement park who understand the error specifications without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41, etc. It is possible to notify that a command reception error has occurred. Furthermore, by continuing to play the BGM in a loop together, even if the employees of the amusement park do not notice that the BGM is in a loop state, it is not a lamp production for a customer waiting demo, and a variable lamp. By grasping that the production is executed in a loop, the employees of the game hall can quickly find the game machine in the error state.

By the way, as the lamp effect, instead of executing the variable lamp effect as described above in a loop, the symbol stop lamp effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 11 (c). That is, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11C, a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) transmitted as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is issued. When the sub-control CPU 800a receives the control signal, the control signal for instructing the execution of the effect pattern for stopping the effect pattern determined at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11C is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c and sub-controlled. Among the control signals for instructing the execution of the effect pattern stored in the control RAM 800c, the control signal related to light is transmitted to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 will execute the design stop lamp effect. This symbol stop lamp effect is to continue a looped pattern by lowering the brightness of a decorative lamp such as an LED lamp that produces a lamp effect effect, or to continue a pattern in which the decorative lamp is repeatedly turned on and off. Is.

Even in this way, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing) at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11C, the symbol stop lamp effect will continue to be executed. Therefore, by continuing to execute the symbol stop lamp effect, even if the liquid crystal display device 41 does not display something like "command reception error", it is possible to inform the employees of the amusement park who understand the error specifications. It is possible to notify that a command reception error has occurred. Furthermore, by continuing to play the BGM in a loop together, even if the employees of the amusement park do not notice that the BGM is in a loop state, it is not a lamp production for a customer waiting demonstration, and it is for stopping the design. By grasping that the lamp effect is being executed by the employees of the game hall, etc., it is possible to quickly find the game machine in the error state.

By the way, in a state where the customer waiting demo command cannot be received and the variable lamp effect continues to be executed in a loop, the special symbol 1 starting port 44 (see FIG. 5) or the special symbol 2 starting port 45 (see FIG. 5). When the game ball wins a prize (detected by the special symbol 1 start port switch 44a (see FIG. 6) or the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6)), the main control is performed at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11 (b). As the effect control command DI_CMD from the board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol) and the designation (for example) of the decorative symbol (special symbol) are specified. , A symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for performing a lost symbol) is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a is an optical control signal among the control signals stored in the sub-control RAM 800c, which is instructed to be executed in response to a scenario in which the effect operation such as sound, light, or image (video) of the effect pattern is stored. The control signal related to the light is transmitted to the decorative lamp board 90. In response to this, the decorative lamp substrate 90 does not stop the variable lamp effect that is being executed in a loop, but is executed in a loop as it is. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without any discomfort.

On the other hand, at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11B, the start hold subtraction command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as the effect control command DI_CMD is used to subtract the number of start hold balls from 1 to 0. (For example, B001H), a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of a variation pattern (for example, a loss pattern 1) of a decorative symbol (special symbol), a symbol designation for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern). When a command (for example, BB01H) is received by the sub-control CPU 800a, it is executed corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a sound, light, or an image (video) of an effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. Among the control signals to be instructed, the command list related to the image (video) is transmitted to the VDP 803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, so that the variable video is liquid crystal. It will be displayed on the display device 41.

Further, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11B, a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) is subordinated as an effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a). It is transmitted to the control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a temporarily stores in the sub-control RAM 800c a control signal instructing execution of the effect pattern for stopping the effect pattern determined at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11 (b). At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to an image (video) among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the VDP 803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41 to display a decorative symbol (special symbol). The image in which the fluctuation of) has stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has stopped is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, in this way, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing) at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11 (b), the image in which the change of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It will continue to be displayed on the device 41. Therefore, by continuing to display the image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has stopped, the game understands the error specifications without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is possible to notify the employees of the field that a command reception error has occurred. Furthermore, by continuing the loop playback of both the BGM and / or the lamp effect, even if the employees of the amusement park do not notice that the BGM and / or the lamp effect is in the loop state, the customer waiting demo movie can be displayed. By understanding that the video that is not displayed and the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has stopped is continuously displayed, the employees of the amusement park can quickly find the gaming machine in the error state. ..

By the way, the special symbol 1 starting port 44 (see FIG. 5) or the special symbol 2 starting port 45 is displayed in a state where the customer waiting demo command cannot be received and the image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped is continuously displayed. When the game ball wins a prize (detected by the special symbol 1 start port switch 44a (see FIG. 6) or the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6)), the timing shown in FIG. 11 (b) is shown. At T4, as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol) and the decorative symbol (special symbol). ) (For example, a lost symbol) is specified (for example, BB01H) is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a is an image among the control signals to be executed in response to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The command list regarding (video) is transmitted to VDP803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41 to display a decorative symbol (special symbol). The variation image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) starts from the image in which the variation of) has stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without any discomfort.

<Explanation of missing symbol stop command>
Next, when the above-mentioned customer waiting demo command is not provided and the gaming state shifts to the customer waiting demo state triggered by the symbol stop command, the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) (FIG. A case where the effect control command DI_CMD, which is a symbol stop command transmitted from 6), cannot be received by the sub-control CPU 800a will be described with reference to FIG.

At the timing T10 shown in FIG. 12A, a start hold subtraction command (for example, B001H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 1 to 0 as an effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a). , The variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol), and the symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating the decoration symbol (special symbol) (for example, loss pattern). ) Is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c.

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a relates to the sound among the control signals to be executed in response to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The control signal is transmitted to the sound LSI 801. In response to this, the sound LSI 801 reads the sound data corresponding to the control signal from the game ROM 805 or the sound RAM 802 and outputs it to the speaker 17. As a result, the BGM corresponding to the above-determined effect pattern is emitted from the speaker 17. At this time, if the BGM has already been reproduced in the sound LSI 801 it will be reproduced as it is, and if the BGM has not been reproduced, it will be reproduced.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a is related to light among the control signals to be executed in response to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The control signal is transmitted to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 controls to turn on or off the decorative lamp such as the LED lamp that exerts the lamp effect effect, so that the variable lamp effect is executed.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a is an image (of the control signals to be instructed to be executed corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, or image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The command list related to (video) is transmitted to VDP803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, so that the variable video is liquid crystal. It will be displayed on the display device 41.

Next, at the timing T11 shown in FIG. 12A, a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) is sub-controlled by the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as the effect control command DI_CMD. It is transmitted to the CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a temporarily stores in the sub-control RAM 800c a control signal instructing execution of the effect pattern for stopping the effect pattern determined at the timing T10 shown in FIG. 12 (a). As a result, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to an image (video) among the control signals for instructing the execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the VDP 803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41 to display a decorative symbol (special symbol). The image in which the fluctuation of) has stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, the sub-control CPU 800a activates a timer for counting a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by receiving a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol). The BGM being reproduced by the sound LSI 801 is continuously reproduced as it is, and the variable lamp effect executed by the sub-control CPU 800a is continuously executed as it is.

Next, when the activated timer counts a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) (see timing T12 shown in FIG. 12A), a control signal instructing execution of an effect pattern for shifting the gaming state to the customer waiting demo state. Is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c.

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal related to sound among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the sound LSI 801. In response to this, the sound LSI 801 fades out the volume of the BGM being reproduced and puts it in a mute state. As a result, BGM cannot be emitted from the speaker 17. The mute state means that the volume is "0" or the volume is difficult for the player to recognize.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal related to light among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the decorative lamp substrate 90. As a result, the decorative lamp substrate 90 controls to turn on or off the decorative lamp such as the LED lamp that exerts the lamp effect effect, so that the customer waiting demonstration lamp effect is executed.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to an image (video) among the control signals for instructing execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the VDP 803. As a result, the VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, so that the customer waiting demo movie can be displayed. It will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, in this way, when the timer is activated by the symbol stop command and the predetermined time is counted, the game state shifts to the customer waiting demo state. After this timer is activated, the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol). However, when it is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a, this timer will be initialized.

However, although the symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as the effect control command DI_CMD, the sub control CPU 800a cannot receive the symbol stop command due to the influence of noise or the like, that is, If it is missing, the counter that counts a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is not activated, so that the game state cannot be changed to the customer waiting demo state. Therefore, in the past, in order to notify that the gaming state cannot shift to the customer waiting demo state, an error display such as "command reception error" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

However, even if the symbol stop command cannot be received, it can operate as a gaming machine if the subsequent commands can be received. Therefore, if an error display such as "command reception error" is displayed, the player is hindered from playing the game. Therefore, there was a problem that unnaturalness remained for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the timing T11 shown in FIG. 12B, even though the symbol stop command is transmitted as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), noise or the like is generated. Due to the influence, when the symbol stop command cannot be received by the sub-control CPU 800a, that is, when it is missing, the liquid crystal display device 41 is prevented from displaying a "command reception error". As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural.

However, by that alone, it is not possible to notify the employees of the amusement park that an error has occurred. Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41, the following processing is performed. Note that the loop reproduction of the BGM and the lamp effect is the same as the processing when the above-mentioned customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing) as shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c). Will be omitted.

At the timing T10 shown in FIG. 12B, a start hold subtraction command (for example, a start hold subtraction command) transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as an effect control command DI_CMD to subtract the number of start hold balls from 1 to 0 (for example). , B001H), a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of a variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of a decorative symbol (special symbol), a symbol designation command (for example, a loss pattern) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol). For example, when the sub control CPU 800a receives the BB01H), the execution instruction is given corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, or image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub control RAM 800c is stored. Among the control signals, the command list related to the image (video) is transmitted to the VDP 803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, so that the variable video is liquid crystal. It will be displayed on the display device 41.

In this variation image, the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is displayed, but since the variation time of the decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, 120 seconds) is fixed, the determined variation time (for example, 120 seconds) is determined. , 120 seconds, etc.), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) will be shaken.

The fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped when the sub-control CPU 800a receives the symbol stop command (for example, BF01H). However, assuming that the symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) could not be received by the sub-control CPU 800a, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 in a loop state. Will be.

Thus, in this way, even if the symbol stop command cannot be received (missing) at the timing T11 shown in FIG. 12 (b), the image in which the decorative symbol (special symbol) is shaken and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It will be displayed on the device 41 in a loop state. Therefore, by continuing to display the image in which the decorative design (special design) is shaking and fluctuating in a loop state, the error specifications are understood without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is possible to notify the employees of the amusement park, etc., that a command reception error has occurred. Furthermore, by continuing the loop playback of both the BGM and / or the lamp effect, even if the employees of the amusement park do not notice that the BGM and / or the lamp effect is in the loop state, the customer waiting demo movie can be displayed. By grasping that the video that is not displayed and the decorative symbol (special symbol) is shaking and fluctuating continues to be displayed in a loop state, the game machine in the error state can be found quickly. can do.

By the way, the special symbol 1 start port 44 (see FIG. 5) or the special symbol is displayed in a loop state in which the symbol stop demo command cannot be received and the image in which the decorative symbol (special symbol) is swaying and fluctuating is continuously displayed. 2 When the game ball wins a prize in the starting port 45 (see FIG. 5) (detected by the special symbol 1 starting port switch 44a (see FIG. 6) or the special symbol 2 starting port switch 45a (see FIG. 6)), FIG. 12 (b). ) At the timing T13, the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol), decoration. A symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a symbol (special symbol) (for example, a lost symbol) is transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a is an image among the control signals to be executed in response to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, and image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The command list regarding (video) is transmitted to VDP803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, so that the variable video is liquid crystal. It will be displayed on the display device 41. Although the image in which the decorative symbol (special symbol) is swaying and fluctuating continues to be displayed in a loop state, the variable image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 when the game ball wins a prize. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without a sense of discomfort.

Instead of displaying the image in which the decorative symbol (special symbol) is swaying and fluctuating on the liquid crystal display device 41 in a loop state, when the predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds or the like) is reached, the decorative symbol (special) is displayed. The fluctuation of the symbol) may be stopped and the identification lamp device 50A (see FIG. 5) may be blinked and displayed. Even in this way, even if the liquid crystal display device 41 does not display something like "command reception error", the employee of the amusement park who understands the error specifications is notified that the command reception error has occurred. It becomes possible. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 41 will continue to display the image of the stopped decorative symbol (special symbol).

By the way, in the present embodiment, the case where the BGM continues to play in a loop due to the inability to receive (miss) the customer waiting demo command or the symbol stop command is illustrated. If it is delayed to discover that the BGM is in the loop state, the BGM will continue to be looped for a long time. In this case, the player next to the gaming machine in the error state may feel this state unpleasant. Therefore, as a scenario of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (special symbol), a process of stopping the BGM after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation time ends may be included. Further, when the customer waiting demo command is transmitted after the symbol stop command, a process may be added to stop the BGM after a predetermined time has elapsed when the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol stop command is executed. Regarding the predetermined time, the time longer than the time from the end of the variable time to the transition from the symbol stop state to the customer waiting demo state (for example, 180 seconds), or after a certain time has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting demo command. When the volume of the BGM being played is faded out (for example, after 60 seconds) and the mute state is set, an employee of the amusement park or the like may have a longer time (for example, 300 seconds) until the mute state is set. It is best to have enough time to find it and not to make the player next to the game machine in the error state feel uncomfortable. Further, as a scenario of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (special symbol), when the BGM is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 41 may display "Mute". As a result, the player can be made to appear as if the player is simply informed that the sound is muted, and the employees of the game hall can be made to discover that the sound is muted due to an error. ..

<Explanation of missing start hold subtraction command>
Next, refer to FIG. 13 for the case where the effect control command DI_CMD, which is a start hold subtraction command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) (see FIG. 6), cannot be received by the sub control CPU 800a. I will explain it.

As shown in FIG. 13 (a-1), the liquid crystal display device 41 wins a prize in the special symbol 1 starting port 44 (see FIG. 5) or the special symbol 2 starting port 45 (see FIG. 5) (special symbol 1 starting port switch). A state in which three game balls held by 44a (see FIG. 6) or the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (detected by the start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6)) are held as start hold balls is displayed (see image P1), and left and middle. , The decorative symbol (special symbol) displayed in the order on the right is displayed in a state of high-speed fluctuation (see image P2). Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (a-2), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) that fluctuates at high speed shown in the image P2 of FIG. 13 (a-1) is stopped (in the figure, the combination symbol is Stop in the state of "123" lost) (see image P3). After that, as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the start hold subtraction command (for example, B003H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 3 to 2, and the decorative symbol (special symbol) A fluctuation pattern command (for example, A001H) for a fluctuation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) and a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern) are transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. Will be done. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c.

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a is an image (of the control signals to be instructed to be executed corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, or image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The command list related to (video) is transmitted to VDP803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, thereby causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image (video) data. As shown in FIG. 13 (a-3), a decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuating at high speed is displayed (see image P4), and the number of start-holding balls is erased from 3 to 1. An animation is displayed in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted (see image P5), and as shown in FIG. 13 (a-4), a state in which two start-holding balls are held is displayed (image). (Refer to P6).

However, despite the fact that the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) has transmitted the start hold subtraction command (for example, B003H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 3 to 2 as the effect control command DI_CMD. If the start hold subtraction command cannot be received by the sub control CPU 800a due to the influence of noise or the like, that is, if the sub control CPU 800a is missing, it is unknown that the number of start hold balls has been subtracted from 3 to 2 in the sub control CPU 800a. As shown in FIG. 13 (a-5), a decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuating at high speed is displayed (see image P4), and the state in which three start-holding balls are held is displayed as it is (see image P1). ) Will be done. That is, the number of start-holding balls actually held and the displayed number of start-holding balls do not match.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (b-1), the state in which three balls are held as the number of start-holding balls is continuously displayed (see image P1), and the decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuating at high speed continues to be displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 13 (b-2), it is stopped (in the figure, it is stopped in a state where the combination symbol is "123" lost) (see image P7). After that, as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the start hold subtraction command (for example, B002H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from two to one, and the decorative symbol (special symbol) A fluctuation pattern command (for example, A001H) for a fluctuation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) and a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern) are transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. Will be done. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c.

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a is an image (of the control signals to be instructed to be executed corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, or image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The command list related to (video) is transmitted to VDP803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, thereby causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image (video) data. As shown in FIG. 13 (b-3), a decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuating at high speed is displayed (see image P8), and the number of start-holding balls is deleted from 3 to 2. An animation (see image P9) in which the number of start-holding balls to be reduced to one is subtracted is displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 13 (b-4), the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a state in which one of the start holding balls is held (see image P10). As a result, the number of start-holding balls actually held and the displayed number of start-holding balls match.

However, if the animation in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted from 3 to 2 is erased to become 1 in this way, the player feels very uncomfortable. Therefore, there was a problem that the game was continued while feeling unnatural. Further, there is a problem that it is necessary to separately prepare an animation in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted so that the number of start-holding balls is erased from three to one.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following processing is performed in order to solve such a problem. That is, as shown in FIG. 13 (c-1), the state in which three balls are held as start holding balls continues to be displayed (see image P1), and the decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuating at high speed changes. , As shown in FIG. 13 (c-2), stop (in the figure, stop in a state where the combination symbol is "123" lost) (see image P7). After that, as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), a start hold subtraction command (for example, B002H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from two to one, and a decorative symbol (of a special symbol). A fluctuation pattern command (for example, A001H) for a fluctuation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) and a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern) are transmitted to the sub-control CPU 800a. Will be done. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the effect pattern corresponding to the received effect control command DI_CMD by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the determined effect. A control signal for instructing execution corresponding to a scenario in which an effect operation such as a pattern sound, light, or an image (video) is stored is temporarily stored in the sub-control RAM 800c.

Then, the sub-control CPU 800a is an image (of the control signals to be instructed to be executed corresponding to the scenario in which the effect operation such as the sound, light, or image (video) of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is stored. The command list related to (video) is transmitted to VDP803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, thereby causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image (video) data. As shown in FIG. 13 (c-3), a decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuating at high speed is displayed (see image P8). Further, the liquid crystal display device 41 instantly displays a state in which two balls are held as the number of start-holding balls (see image P11). At this time, instead of displaying an animation on the liquid crystal display device 41 in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted from the number of start-holding balls that is erased from three to two, three pieces are held as start-holding balls. The display will be switched instantly from the state in which the image is on to the state in which two images are on hold.

Then, from this state, an animation in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted so that the number of start-holding balls is erased from two to one is started, and as shown in FIG. 13 (c-4), the liquid crystal is displayed. The display device 41 displays an animation (see image P12) in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted so that the number of start-holding balls is erased from two to one (see image P12). ), The state in which one ball is held as the number of balls held for starting is displayed (see image P13).

By doing so, the player is accustomed to instantly switching the display from the state in which the number of start-holding balls is held to 3 to the state in which 2 are held, and the number is subtracted from 2 to 1. Since the animation is displayed, it is possible to return to the start hold display in which the number of normal start hold balls is displayed without giving the player a great sense of discomfort. As a result, the player can continue the game without feeling unnatural. In addition, it is not necessary to separately prepare an animation in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted from the number of start-holding balls of 3 to 1 by erasing two of them.

In the present embodiment, an example of transmitting a start hold subtraction command in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 3 to 2 or 2 to 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the start hold is simply held. A start hold command indicating the number of balls may be used (for example, B003H is used both when the number of start hold balls decreases from 3 to 2 and when the number of start hold balls increases from 1 to 2). It can be a start hold command that is executed). That is, when the sub control CPU 800a receives such a start hold command, the sub control CPU 800a stores the number of start hold balls in the sub control RAM 800c. As a result, for example, if a start hold command is received in which the number of start hold balls stored in the sub control RAM 800c is 3 and the number of start hold balls is 2, the sub control CPU 800a has 1 start hold ball. It can be seen that the number has been subtracted. Therefore, the start hold command that the number of start hold balls stored in the sub-control RAM 800c is 3 and the number of start hold balls is 2 cannot be received, and the start hold command that the number of start hold balls is 1 is received. Even if it is done, since it is known that the subtraction has been made, the liquid crystal display device 41 will display the display as shown in FIGS. 13 (c-3) to 13 (c-5).

On the other hand, although the start hold subtraction command (for example, B003H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 3 to 2 is transmitted, the start hold subtraction command is issued by the effect control CPU 900 due to the influence of noise or the like. It is also conceivable that the game ball enters (wins) the special symbol 1 starting port 44 or the special symbol 2 starting port 45 in a state where reception is not possible, that is, in a missing state. At this time, even if the start hold increase command (for example, B103H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 2 to 3 is transmitted, the displayed number of start hold balls does not change. Therefore, at this time, it is not necessary to perform the animation in which the number of reserved balls for starting is increased from two to three.

However, if the animation in which the number of reserved balls for starting is increased is not executed even though the game ball has entered (winning) the special symbol 1 starting port 44 or the special symbol 2 starting port 45, the player is disadvantaged. You may feel that you have suffered. Therefore, in order to reduce such a situation, the display is instantly switched from the state in which the number of start-holding balls is held to 3 to the state in which 2 pieces are held, and the number of start-holding balls increases from 2 to 3. You may want to display the familiar animation that is done.

<Explanation of game ROM>
Next, the game ROM 805 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.

As shown in FIG. 14A, when the game ROM 805 has, for example, a memory area of 10 Gbit, the memory areas include a CG data storage area 805a, a free area 805b, and a sound data storage area 805c. It is composed of. In the CG data storage area 805a, the CG data of the still image compressed data and the moving image compressed data are arranged and stored from the start address. Then, in the sound data storage area 805c, sound data such as BGM and sound effects are arranged and stored from an address address starting from a predetermined address address (6 Gbit address address in the figure).

Then, in the game ROM 805 in which the data is arranged in this way, the CG data (still image compressed data or the moving image compressed data) is read out by accessing the CG data storage area 805a in the VDP 803, and the sound is heard. By accessing the sound data storage area 805c in the LSI801, sound data such as BGM and sound effects are read out.

By the way, when accessing the sound data storage area 805c, the sound LSI 801 is accessed by adding a predetermined address address (in the figure, an address address of 6 Gbit) as an offset value to the address pointer. Specifically, when reading the sound data "A" stored in the 8 Gbit address address shown in FIG. 14 (a), the sound LSI 801 uses the address pointer as a predetermined address address (6 Gbit address address in the figure). Is added as an offset value, and the sound data "A" stored in the address address of 8 Gbit is read out. The predetermined address address (6 Gbit address address in the figure) is stored in the control program describing the effect control procedure stored in the sub control ROM 800b or the control data referred to by the control program.

By the way, the reason why the free area 805b is provided between the CG data storage area 805a and the sound data storage area 805c is as follows.

That is, conventionally, like the game ROM 805 as shown in the present embodiment, CG data of still image compressed data and moving image compressed data, and sound data such as BGM and sound effects are stored in advance in FIG. 15. The game ROM 8050 shown in the above is known. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the game ROM 8050 has, for example, a memory area of 10 Gbit, the memory areas include a CG data storage area 8050a, a sound data storage area 8050b, and a free area 8050c. Consists of ,. In the CG data storage area 8050a, the CG data of the still image compressed data and the moving image compressed data are arranged and stored from the start address. Then, in the sound data storage area 8050b, sound data such as BGM and sound effects are arranged and stored from an address address starting from a predetermined address address (in the figure, an address address of 4 Gbit).

Here, during development, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the CG data storage area 8050a is changed from 4 Gbit to 3 Gbit, the start address address of the sound data storage area 8050b is changed from 4 Gbit to 3 Gbit. Will be done. Then, the address address of the sound data "A" stored in the address address of 6 Gbit shown in FIG. 15 (a) is changed to the address address of 5 Gbit as shown in FIG. 15 (b). It becomes. As a result, it is necessary to modify the program to match this address address, and therefore, it is necessary to modify the program each time the used capacity of the CG data storage area 8050a is changed, which improves the efficiency of development. There was a problem that it would drop.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, assuming that the used capacity of the CG data storage area 8050a is changed, a free area 805b is provided between the CG data storage area 805a and the sound data storage area 805c. .. As a result, even if the used capacity of the CG data storage area 805a is increased or decreased (see the arrow Y1 shown in FIG. 14A), the address address of the sound data storage area 805c is not changed. Therefore, it is not necessary to modify the program each time the used capacity of the CG data storage area 805a is changed, so that the efficiency of development can be improved. When the free area 805b is provided between the CG data storage area 805a and the sound data storage area 805c in this way, as described above, the sound LSI 801 can access the sound data storage area 805c when accessing the sound data storage area 805c. It is accessed by adding a predetermined address (6 Gbit address in the figure) as an offset value to the address pointer.

On the other hand, even if the free area 805b is not provided between the CG data storage area 805a and the sound data storage area 805c, as shown in FIG. 14B, sound data such as BGM and sound effect from the start address of the game ROM 805. The sound data storage area 805c is provided so that As described above, the CG data storage area 805a may be provided and then the free area 805b may be provided. In this way, if the sound data storage area 805c is provided in front of the CG data storage area 805a whose used capacity may be changed, the used capacity of the CG data storage area 805a increases or decreases (FIG. 14 (b)). Even if the arrow Y2 is shown), the address address of the sound data storage area 805c is not changed. Even in this way, it is not necessary to modify the program each time the used capacity of the CG data storage area 805a is changed, so that the efficiency of development can be improved. When the sound data storage area 805c is provided in front of the CG data storage area 805a whose used capacity may be changed, dummy data (dummy data) so that the start address address of the CG data storage area 805a does not change. It is necessary to fix the used capacity of the sound data storage area 805c (4 Gbit in this embodiment) by using 00H) or the like.

By the way, when the CG data of the still image compressed data and the moving image compressed data and the sound data such as BGM and sound effects are stored in the game ROM 805, the CG data and the sound data cannot be accessed at the same time. There was a problem that the processing became inefficient.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 is stored in a predetermined storage of the sound RAM 802 using the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6). The data is transferred to the area 802a. In this way, the sound LSI 801 is stored in the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802 while the VDP 803 is accessing the CG data storage area 805a of the game ROM 805 in order to acquire the CG data. The transferred sound data can be read out. As a result, the efficiency of processing can be improved. Further, since the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 is transferred to the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802 using the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6), the data is in the middle of development. Even if a change occurs, it will be possible to flexibly respond to the data change.

By the way, the transfer by the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6) is instructed by the sub-control CPU 800a to the DMA controller 800a1 in the initial process executed at the time of turning on the power, and based on this, the DMA controller 800a1 performs one process. Therefore, all the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 is transferred to the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802. The sub-control CPU 800a performs initial processing during data transfer by the DMA controller 800a1. That is, the initial processing by the sub-control CPU 800a and the data transfer by the DMA controller 800a1 are performed in parallel. As a result, the efficiency of processing can be further improved.

On the other hand, the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6) transfers all the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 to the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802, and then executes the refreshing process at a predetermined timing. Will be done. By doing so, the sound data stored in the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802 can be kept normal.

By the way, in the transfer by the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6), all the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 is stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 in the initial process executed when the power is turned on, in the predetermined storage area of the sound RAM 802. It will be transferred in one process in 802a. However, when executing the refresh process, the sound data to be transferred is divided into a plurality of pieces, and the data transferred at one time is made smaller than the data transferred in the initial process and transferred over a plurality of times. Become. By doing so, for example, when a VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) indicating that one frame of image data has been displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is received, the next one frame of image data is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Sound data can be transferred before being drawn on the device 41. As a result, the refresh process can be executed while the sound LSI 801 is not accessing the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802, so that the sound LSI 801 is accessing the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802. It is possible to reduce the situation where the refresh process is executed.

By the way, when the sound LSI 801 erroneously accesses the CG data storage area 805a when accessing the sound data storage area 805c, or when the VDP 803 erroneously accesses the CG data storage area 805a, the sound data storage is erroneously performed. When the area 805c is accessed, the sub-control CPU 800a can access the address address for error processing predetermined by the decoding error. At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a may execute error processing or infinite loop processing, and may be reset by a watchdog timer (WDT) (not shown). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production of images and sounds from becoming abnormal by accessing unexpected data and reading erroneous data.

In this embodiment, an example of transferring the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 to a predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802 using the DMA controller 800a1 is shown. Not limited to this, the CG data stored in the CG data storage area 805a of the game ROM 805 may be transferred to a predetermined storage area of the DDR2 SDRAM 804 using the DMA controller 800a1.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which CG data of still image compressed data and moving image compressed data and sound data such as BGM and sound effects are stored in advance in the game ROM 805, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The control program describing the effect control procedure stored in the sub-control ROM 800b shown in FIG. 6 can also be stored in the control program storage area 805d as shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, a control program storage area 805d is provided after the sound data storage area 805c so as to correspond to the change in the used capacity of the CG data storage area 805a described above, and the control program is provided. Should be memorized. At this time, the control program stored in the control program storage area 805d may be transferred to the sub-control RAM 800c by using the DMA controller 800a1 in the initial process executed when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable that the DMA controller 800a1 does not execute the refresh process. This is because the sub-control CPU 800a frequently accesses the sub-control RAM 800c, and there is not much period of non-access.

Further, in the present embodiment, any one of the CG data of the still image compressed data and the moving image compressed data and the sound data such as BGM and sound effect is arranged from the head address address, but the present invention is not limited to the 10th address and the like. It may be arranged from a specific address. This is because there is a possibility that data different from CG data and sound data, such as ROM version information, may be placed at the start address.

<Explanation of decorative patterns and resident patterns>
Next, the decorative symbol and the resident symbol will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 34.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the decorative design is displayed large in the center of the screen as shown in the image P1A of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the left decorative design (see image P1Aa) and the middle decorative design (see image P1Ab). ) And the right decorative design (see image P1Ac). In the figure, the left decorative symbol (image P1Aa) stops at "7", the middle decorative symbol (see image P1Ab) stops at "6", and the right decorative symbol (image P1Ac) stops at "7". It is stopped in the state of reach loss.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, the resident symbol is displayed small at the lower right corner of the screen as shown in the image P2A of the liquid crystal display device 41. This resident symbol is a reduced number indicated by the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed, and is, in principle, variablely displayed in synchronization with the decorative symbol. Specifically, the resident symbol is composed of a left resident symbol (see image P2Aa), a middle resident symbol (see image P2Ab), and a right resident symbol (see image P2Ac). This left resident symbol (see image P2Aa) corresponds to the left decorative symbol (see image P1Aa), and is stopped at "7" in the figure. The middle resident symbol (see image P2Ab) corresponds to the middle decorative symbol (see image P1Ab), and is stopped at "6" in the figure. Further, the right resident symbol (see image P2Ac) corresponds to the right decorative symbol (see image P1Ac), and is stopped at "7" in the figure.

Thus, in a state where the decorative symbol and the resident symbol as described above are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, the decorative symbols (see images P3A and P5A) are variablely displayed as shown in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c). As the result is increased, the resident symbols (see images P4A and P6A) will be displayed in a variable manner accordingly. Specifically, when the left resident symbol (see image P2Aa) shown in FIG. 18A is variablely displayed, it is switched to the +1 left resident symbol as shown in the image P4Aa shown in FIG. 18B. Further, as shown in the image P6Aa shown in FIG. 18 (c), the symbol is switched to the left resident symbol which has been increased by +1 and displayed. Then, when the middle resident symbol (see image P2Ab) shown in FIG. 18A is variablely displayed, it is displayed by switching to the +1 middle resident symbol as shown in the image P4Ab shown in FIG. 18B. Further, as shown in the image P6Ab shown in FIG. 18C, the symbol is switched to the +1 resident symbol and displayed. Further, when the right resident symbol (see image P2Ac) shown in FIG. 18 (c) is variablely displayed, it is switched to the +1 right resident symbol and displayed as shown in the image P4Ac shown in FIG. 18 (b). Further, as shown in the image P6Ab shown in FIG. 18C, the symbol is switched to the +1 right resident symbol and displayed.

However, when the resident symbol is changed as described above, as shown in FIG. 18, in the change after the reach loss, the left resident symbol and the right resident symbol change in synchronization with each other, so that the reach effect occurs again. There was a problem that it could mislead the player into thinking that he would do it. Also, in the fluctuation after the jackpot, the left resident symbol, the middle resident symbol, and the right resident symbol are all the same symbol, so it seems that they are fluctuating in the full rotation state, so the jackpot effect may occur again. There was a problem that it could mislead the player as to whether it was there.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the following processing is performed in order to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, as shown in FIG. 19A, after the decorative symbol (see image P1A) and the resident symbol (see image P2A) are stopped in the reach loss state on the liquid crystal display device 41, at the timing T1A shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) to the sub control CPU 800a as the effect control command DI_CMD. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a temporarily stores in the sub-control RAM 800c a control signal instructing execution of the fluctuation pattern determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. As a result, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to an image (video) among the control signals for instructing the execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, the image in which the decorative symbol and the resident symbol are changed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19B, when the decorative symbol (see image P10A) scrolls and starts to fluctuate, the resident symbol is instantly changed to a predetermined resident symbol (see image P11A). Switch. That is, the left resident symbol (see image P2Aa) displayed as "7" as shown in FIG. 19 (a) is switched to "1" as shown in FIG. 19 (b) (see image P11Aa). The medium-resident symbol (see image P2Ab) displayed as "6" as shown in FIG. 19 (a) is switched to "2" (see image P11Ab) as shown in FIG. 19 (b), and FIG. 19 The right resident symbol (see image P2Ac) displayed as "7" as shown in (a) is switched to "3" (see image P11Ac) as shown in FIG. 19 (b). Then, after instantly switching to a predetermined resident symbol (see image P11A), as shown in FIGS. 19 (c) to 19 (e), the resident symbol from the switched resident symbol (see image P11A) is displayed in a variable manner. It will be done. That is, the left resident symbol (see image P11Aa) shown in FIG. 19 (b) that was instantly switched is displayed by being switched to the +1 left resident symbol as shown in the image P12Aa shown in FIG. 19 (c). , As shown in the image P13Aa shown in FIG. 19 (d), is displayed by switching to the +1 left resident symbol, and further, as shown in the image P14Aa shown in FIG. 19 (d), the +1 left resident symbol is displayed. It will be switched to and displayed. Further, the resident symbol (see image P11Ab) shown in FIG. 19 (b) that was instantly switched is displayed by being switched to the +1 resident symbol as shown in the image P12Ab shown in FIG. 19 (c), and further. , As shown in the image P13Ab shown in FIG. 19 (d), is displayed by switching to the +1 resident symbol, and further, as shown in the image P14Ab shown in FIG. 19 (d), the +1 resident symbol is displayed. It will be switched to and displayed. On the other hand, the right resident symbol (see image P11Ac) shown in FIG. 19 (b) that was instantly switched is displayed by being switched to the +1 right resident symbol as shown in the image P12Ac shown in FIG. 19 (c). Further, as shown in the image P13Ac shown in FIG. 19 (d), it is displayed by switching to the +1 right resident symbol, and further, as shown in the image P14Ac shown in FIG. 19 (d), the +1 right resident symbol is displayed. It will be switched to the design and displayed. The decorative design scrolls and fluctuates as shown in the image P15A shown in FIG. 19C, the image P16A shown in FIG. 19D, and the image P17A shown in FIG. 19E. .. Thus, by scrolling and fluctuating the decorative symbol in this way, the symbol displayed at the stop position in the center of the screen is sequentially switched.

However, by starting the change of the resident symbol from the predetermined symbol regardless of the previous stop symbol in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the decorative symbol and the resident symbol. .. Furthermore, since the resident symbols are only switched instantly, control can be simplified. In the present embodiment, an example in which the decorative symbol is scrolled and fluctuates is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbols may be sequentially switched in the same manner as the resident symbol. Further, the decorative symbol may be changed at the stop position by horizontal rotation around the Y axis (vertical axis in the figure) or vertical rotation around the X axis (horizontal axis in the figure). good.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 20, at the timing T1, the left resident symbol, the middle resident symbol, and the right resident symbol all fluctuate at high speed. Further, since the resident symbol does not scroll and fluctuate like the decorative symbol, it is possible to switch the symbol instantly at the timing T1 without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 20, at the timing T1, the resident symbols (left resident symbol, middle resident symbol, right resident symbol) fluctuate at high speed, and the decorative symbols (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decoration) are changed at high speed. When the symbol) starts to fluctuate, at the timing T2A, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for rapidly fluctuating the decorative symbol (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) to VDP803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), an image in which the decorative pattern (see image P18A) fluctuates at high speed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T3A shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the left decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (g), an image in which the left decorative symbol (see image P19Aa) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the left decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the stop symbol of the left decorative symbol is "2", as shown in FIG. 20, the symbol "9" that starts decelerating fluctuation from the symbol "6" that is fluctuating at high speed. , And the deceleration fluctuation has started. It should be noted that when the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed, the transparency is increased (for example, translucent) and the fluctuates at high speed. There is no.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 19 (g), an image in which the left decorative symbol (see image P19Aa) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further shown in FIG. 19 (h). As described above, the image in which the left decorative pattern (see image P20Aa) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T3Aa shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for stopping or shaking the left decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (i), the left decorative symbol (see image P21Aa) becomes a stop symbol (“2” in the figure) of the left decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, and is stopped or stopped. The shaking and fluctuating image will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T4A shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the right decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (j), an image in which the right decorative symbol (see image P22Ac) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the right decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the stop symbol of the right decorative symbol is "3", as shown in FIG. 20, the symbol "1" that starts the deceleration fluctuation from the symbol of "4" that is fluctuating at high speed. , And the deceleration fluctuation has started. It should be noted that when the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed, the transparency is increased (for example, translucent) and the fluctuates at high speed. There is no.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 19 (j), an image in which the right decorative symbol (see image P22Ac) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further shown in FIG. 19 (k). As described above, the image in which the right decorative pattern (see image P23Ac) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T4Aa shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for stopping or shaking the right decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (l), the right decorative symbol (see image P24Ac) becomes a stop symbol (“3” in the figure) of the right decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, and is stopped or stopped. The shaking and fluctuating image will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T5A shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the intermediate decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (m), an image in which the intermediate decorative symbol (see image P25Ab) is decelerated and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the stop symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol is "5", as shown in FIG. 20, the symbol "3" that starts decelerating fluctuation from the symbol "8" that is fluctuating at high speed. , And the deceleration fluctuation has started. In addition, when the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed, the transparency is increased (for example, translucent) and the fluctuates at high speed. There is no.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 19 (m), an image in which the intermediate decorative symbol (see image P25Ab) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further shown in FIG. 19 (n). As described above, the image in which the intermediate decorative pattern (see image P26Ab) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T5Aa shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for stopping or shaking the intermediate decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (o), the intermediate decorative symbol (see image P27Ab) becomes a stop symbol (“5” in the figure) of the intermediate decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, and is stopped or stopped. The shaking and fluctuating image will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T6A shown in FIG. 20, a symbol determination command is transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) to the sub control CPU 800a as an effect control command DI_CMD. In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for determining the symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (p), the stopped decorative symbol (see image P28A) and the stopped resident symbol (see image P29A) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, the resident symbol is switched to the stopped symbol regardless of the update order of the changing symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the left resident symbol is switched from the changing symbol “6” to the stopped symbol “2” and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 as shown in FIG. 19 (p). (See image P29Aa). Then, as shown in FIG. 20, the middle-resident symbol is switched from the changing symbol “7” to the stop symbol “5” and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 as shown in FIG. 19 (p). (Refer to image P29Ab). Further, the right resident symbol is switched from the changing symbol "8" to the stop symbol "3" as shown in FIG. 20, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 as shown in FIG. 19 (p). (See image P29Ac).

By doing so, it is only necessary to replace the fluctuating resident symbol with the stop symbol, so that the control can be simplified. Furthermore, it is possible to replace the resident symbol with a stopped symbol without waiting for the timing at which the resident symbol is switched to the next resident symbol. At this time, the number of frames is smaller than the number of frames required to switch to the next resident symbol, but the scrolling does not change like the decorative symbol, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, since the resident symbol can be stopped in the same state as the decorative symbol is stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the decorative symbol and the resident symbol.

By the way, the processing from the fluctuation start to the fluctuation stop shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 is performed using the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols and the resident symbol fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA shown in FIG. 21 (a). ing. The normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA for the decorative symbol is one of the plurality of effect scenario data PS_DATA shown in FIG. 9A stored in the sub-control ROM 800b, and the resident symbol variation scenario ZS_DATA is also included. , Is one of the plurality of effect scenario data PS_DATA shown in FIG. 9A stored in the sub-control ROM 800b. In this embodiment, since the processing is completed in 12 seconds from the timing T1A to the timing T6A shown in FIG. 20, the processing is completed in 364 frames with 1 frame 33 ms.

As shown in FIG. 21B, the resident symbol variation scenario ZS_DATA is resident at the timing T1A, which is the first frame, when the left resident symbol is subjected to the variation processing as shown in the timings T1A to T6A shown in FIG. 20. Processing is performed in the symbol variation start sequence table L, processing is provided for doing nothing from the second frame to the fourth frame, and then the symbol transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) from the fifth frame. The resident symbol change stop sequence table L is processed by the resident symbol changing sequence table L until the confirmation command is received, and the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received. It is designed to be processed at. Then, when the middle resident symbol is subjected to the fluctuation processing as shown in the timings T1A to T6A shown in FIG. 20, at the timing T1A which is the first frame, the processing is performed by the resident symbol fluctuation start sequence table C from the second frame. A process of doing nothing until the 4th frame is provided, and then, from the 5th frame until the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received, the resident symbol is changing in the sequence table C. By performing the processing and receiving the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the processing is performed in the resident symbol fluctuation stop sequence table C. Further, when the right resident symbol is subjected to the variation processing as shown in the timings T1A to T6A shown in FIG. 20, at the timing T1A which is the first frame, the right resident symbol is processed by the resident symbol variation start sequence table R, and the second frame. A process of doing nothing from the 4th frame to the 4th frame is provided, and then the resident symbol changing sequence table R is displayed from the 5th frame until the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received. By receiving the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the processing is performed in the resident symbol fluctuation stop sequence table R. The processing performed by the resident symbol changing sequence table L / C / R performed from the 5th frame is performed until the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received. It becomes. As a result, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) becomes irrelevant, and it is sufficient to prepare only the fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA for the resident symbol. It should be noted that the determination of the current frame number is measured by the fluctuation scenario timer measured at the time of the fluctuation scenario.

Here, the resident symbol change start sequence table L, C, R, the resident symbol change in progress sequence table L, C, R, and the resident symbol change stop sequence table L, C, R will be specifically described with reference to FIG. ..

As shown in FIG. 22A, the area of the resident symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is predetermined. That is, the object Lx0 for displaying the left resident symbol is arranged in the resident symbol area L, and the object Cx0 for displaying the middle resident symbol is arranged in the resident symbol area C and displays the right resident symbol. The object Rx0 for this purpose is arranged in the resident symbol area R. Thus, by designating and setting the symbol number in the objects Lx0, Cx0, and Rx0, the symbol image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, by setting the symbol number: 0 to 8 (0 = 1 symbol, 1 = 2 symbol, ..., 8 = 9 symbol) and setting the symbol number in the variables ZuL, ZuC, ZuR, the symbol image Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 22 (b-1), in the resident symbol change start sequence table L, the resident symbol region L changes from "123" regardless of the stop symbol of the previous change. ZuL = 0 is set to. As a result, the VDP 803 displays the left resident symbol (see image P11Aa), which is the symbol “1”, on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the timing T1A shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 19 (b). It will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (c-1), in the resident symbol change start sequence table C, ZuC = in the resident symbol area C so that the resident symbol changes from "123" regardless of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation. 1 is set. As a result, the VDP 803 displays the middle-resident symbol (see image P11Ab), which is the symbol “2”, on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the timing T1A shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 19 (b). It will be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (d-1), in the resident symbol change start sequence table R, ZuR is set in the resident symbol area R so that the resident symbol changes from "123" regardless of the stop symbol of the previous change. = 2 is set. As a result, the VDP803 displays the right resident symbol (see image P11Ac), which is the symbol “3”, on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the timing T1A shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 19 (b). It will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22 (b-2), in the resident symbol changing sequence table L, in order to increase the symbol by +1 at predetermined time intervals, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), at the time of setting. , ZuL = ZuL + 1, and ZuL is set in the resident symbol area L. Then, a process of doing nothing from the second frame to the fourth frame is provided so that the player can recognize that the left resident symbol is fluctuating, and then, returning to the beginning, the resident symbol is set as ZuL = ZuL + 1. The process of setting ZuL in the area L is repeated. As a result, the VDP 803 can display the state in which the left resident symbol is changing on the liquid crystal display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 19 (c) to 19 (o) by sequentially switching the left resident symbols. The timer of the resident symbol changing sequence table L is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (c-2), in the resident symbol changing sequence table C, in order to increase the symbol by +1 at predetermined time intervals, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), at the time of setting. , ZuC = ZuC + 1, and ZuC is set in the resident symbol area C. Then, a process of doing nothing from the second frame to the fourth frame is provided so that the player can recognize that the middle resident symbol is fluctuating, and then, returning to the beginning, the resident symbol is set as ZuC = ZuC + 1. The process of setting ZuC in the area C is repeated. As a result, the VDP 803 can display the state in which the middle resident symbol is changing on the liquid crystal display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 19 (c) to 19 (o) by sequentially switching the middle resident symbols. The timer of the resident symbol changing sequence table C is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (d-2), in the resident symbol changing sequence table R, in order to increase the symbol by +1 at predetermined time intervals, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), at the time of setting. , ZuR = ZuR + 1, and ZuR is set in the resident symbol area R. Then, a process of doing nothing from the second frame to the fourth frame is provided so that the player can recognize that the right resident symbol is fluctuating, and then, returning to the beginning, the resident symbol is set as ZuR = ZuR + 1. The process of setting ZuR in the area R is repeated. As a result, the VDP 803 can display the state in which the right resident symbol is changing on the liquid crystal display device 41 as shown in FIGS. 19 (c) to 19 (o) by sequentially switching the right resident symbols. The timer of the resident symbol changing sequence table R is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22 (b-3), in the resident symbol change stop sequence table L, the resident symbol changing sequence table L shown in FIG. 22 (b-2) is used regardless of the update order of the changing symbols. ZuL = STOP_L1 (STOP_L1 = 1) is set in the resident symbol area L so that the symbol can be switched to the stopped symbol (regardless of the processing timing). As a result, the VDP803 displays the left resident symbol (see image P29Aa), which is the symbol “2”, on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the timing T6A shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 19 (p). It will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (c-3), in the resident symbol change stop sequence table C, regardless of the update order of the changing symbols (in the resident symbol changing sequence table C shown in FIG. 22 (c-2)). ZuC = STOP_C1 (STOP_C1 = 4) is set in the resident symbol area C so that the symbol can be switched to the stopped symbol (regardless of the processing timing). As a result, the VDP803 displays the middle-resident symbol (see image P29Ab), which is the symbol “5”, on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the timing T6A shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 19 (p). It will be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22 (d-3), in the resident symbol change stop sequence table R, the resident symbol changing sequence table R shown in FIG. 22 (d-2) is irrespective of the update order of the changing symbols. ZuR = STOP_R1 (STOP_R1 = 2) is set in the resident symbol area R so that the symbol can be switched to the stopped symbol (regardless of the processing timing). As a result, the VDP803 displays the right resident symbol (see image P29Ac), which is the symbol “3”, on the liquid crystal display device 41 at the timing T6A shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 (b), as shown in FIG. 19 (p). It will be displayed.

Thus, in this way, the processing from the change start to the change stop of the resident symbols shown in the timings T1A to T6A shown in FIG. 20 is performed using the resident symbol fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA shown in FIG. 21 (b). Become.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the symbol is changed by switching the symbol of the resident symbol is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a moving image may be played. That is, using VDP803 in the resident symbol area L shown in FIG. 22 (a), a moving image that starts to fluctuate from 1 such as "1 ⇒ 2 ⇒ 3 ⇒ ... ⇒ 8 ⇒ 9 ⇒" is played, and the resident symbol is reproduced. Using VDP803 for the area C, play the video that starts to fluctuate from 2 such as "2⇒3⇒4⇒...⇒9⇒1⇒", and use VDP803 for the resident symbol area R to "3⇒". It is also possible to play a moving image that starts to fluctuate from 3 such as "4 ⇒ 5 ⇒ ... ⇒ 1 ⇒ 2 ⇒". If you want to stop the fluctuation of the resident symbol, you may stop the playback of the moving image and replace it with the stopped symbol. Further, this moving image may be stored in the game ROM 805.

On the other hand, even if you do not prepare three videos, you can prepare one video "1⇒2⇒3⇒...⇒8⇒9⇒" and make the time to start the video playback different. The moving image that starts to fluctuate from 1 may be displayed, the moving image that starts to fluctuate from 2, and the moving image that starts to fluctuate from 3 may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 21 (c), the normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols is the timing that is the first frame when the left decorative symbol is subjected to the variation processing as shown in the timings T1A to T6A shown in FIG. 20. Processing is performed by the fluctuation start sequence table X from T1A to the 80th frame, processing is performed by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X from the timing T2A to the 93rd frame, which is the 81st frame, and the timing T3A is the 94th frame. Processing is performed by the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X from time to timing T3Aa (see FIG. 20) until one frame before, and processing is performed by the swing fluctuation sequence table X from timing T3Aa (see FIG. 20) to the 363rd frame. At the timing T6A, which is the 364th frame, processing is performed by the fluctuation stop sequence table X.

Then, when the intermediate decorative symbol is subjected to the variation processing as shown in the timings T1A to T6A shown in FIG. 20, the variation start sequence table Y is used to perform the variation processing from the timing T1A to the 80th frame, which is the first frame, 81. Processing is performed by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y from the timing T2A to the 273rd frame, which is the frame, and the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y is performed from the timing T5A to the timing T5Aa (see FIG. 20), which is the 274th frame. At timing T5Aa (see FIG. 20) to the 363rd frame, processing is performed by the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table Y, and at timing T6A, which is the 364th frame, processing is performed by the fluctuation stop sequence table Y. It has become.

Further, when the right decorative symbol is subjected to the variation processing as shown in the timings T1A to T6A shown in FIG. 20, the variation start sequence table Z is used to perform the variation processing from the timing T1A to the 80th frame, which is the first frame, 81. Processing is performed by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z from the timing T2A to the 2183th frame, which is the frame, and the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z is performed from the timing T4A to the timing T4Aa (see FIG. 20), which is the 184th frame. At timing T4Aa (see FIG. 20) to the 363rd frame, processing is performed by the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table Z, and at timing T6A, which is the 364th frame, processing is performed by the fluctuation stop sequence table Z. It has become. It should be noted that the determination of the current frame number is measured by the fluctuation scenario timer measured at the time of the fluctuation scenario.

Here, the fluctuation start sequence table X, Y, Z, the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, the fluctuation stop sequence table X, Y. , Z will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27.

As shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to 23 (d-1), the area of the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is predetermined. That is, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to 23 (d-1), in order to display the objects L0 to L3 for displaying the left decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the middle decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41. Objects C0 to C3 and objects R0 to R3 for displaying the right decorative pattern on the liquid crystal display device 41 are prepared. Then, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to 23 (d-1), four scenes are prepared as display modes of the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. That is, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) among the four scenes, the symbol variation scene X1, the symbol variation scene Y1, and the symbol variation scene Z1 are prepared. In the symbol variation scene X1, of the objects L0 to L3, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the upper half of the object L0, the object L1 and the lower half of the object L2. Then, in the symbol variation scene Y1, of the objects C0 to C3, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the upper half of the object C0, the object C1, and the lower half of the object C2. Further, in the symbol variation scene Z1, of the objects R0 to R3, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the upper half of the object R0, the object L1, and the lower half of the object L2.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (b-1), a symbol variation scene X2, a symbol variation scene Y2, and a symbol variation scene Z2 are prepared. In this symbol variation scene X2, among the objects L0 to L3, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a little above the object L0, the object L1, and most of the objects L2. Then, in the symbol variation scene Y2, among the objects C0 to C3, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a little above the object C0, the object C1, and most of the objects C2. Further, in the symbol variation scene Z2, among the objects R0 to R3, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a little above the object R0, the object R1, and most of the objects R2.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), a symbol variation scene X3, a symbol variation scene Y3, and a symbol variation scene Z3 are prepared. In the symbol variation scene X3, among the objects L0 to L3, the object L1 and the object L2 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Then, in the symbol variation scene Y3, among the objects C0 to C3, the object C1 and the object C2 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, in the symbol variation scene Z3, among the objects R0 to R3, the object R1 and the object R2 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (d-1), a symbol variation scene X4, a symbol variation scene Y4, and a symbol variation scene Z4 are prepared. In this symbol variation scene X4, among the objects L0 to L3, most of the objects L1 and the object L2 and the lower part of the object L3 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Then, in the symbol variation scene Y4, most of the objects C1 and C2 and a little lower part of the object C3 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 among the objects C0 to C3. Further, in the symbol variation scene Z4, among the objects R0 to R3, most of the objects R1 and R2 and the lower part of the objects R3 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, by repeating the scenes shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to 23 (d-1), the symbols can be moved frame by frame, so that the decorative symbols appear to be scrolling.

More specifically, by setting the objects L0 to L4, C0 to C4, and R0 to R4 by designating the symbol numbers, it is possible to make the symbol image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 appear to be scrolling. can. Specifically, by setting the symbol numbers: 0 to 8 (0 = 1 symbol, 1 = 2 symbols, ..., 8 = 9 symbols) and setting the symbol numbers in the variables ZugaraL, ZugaraC, and ZugaraR, the liquid crystal display is displayed. The symbol image to be displayed is displayed on the device 41. Explaining with a specific example, as shown in FIG. 19A, when it is desired to start the fluctuation from the decorative symbol (see image P1A) stopped at "767", it can be processed as follows. First, the following equations hold for the objects L0 to L3, C0 to C3, and R0 to R3.

Object L3 = GAZOU (ZugaraL + 2)
Object L2 = GAZOU (ZugaraL + 1)
Object L1 = GAZOU (ZugaraL)
Object L0 = GAZOU (ZugaraL-1)
Object C3 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 2)
Object C2 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 1)
Object C1 = GAZOU (ZugaraC)
Object C0 = GAZOU (ZugaraC-1)
Object R3 = GAZOU (ZugaraR + 2)
Object R2 = GAZOU (ZugaraR + 1)
Object R1 = GAZOU (ZugaraR)
Object R0 = GAZOU (ZugaraR-1)

By the way, this GAZOU corresponds to decorative symbols 1 to 9 as shown in FIG. 27 (a). That is, GAZOU (0) corresponds to decorative symbol 1, GAZOU (1) corresponds to decorative symbol 2, GAZOU (2) corresponds to decorative symbol 3, ..., GAZOU (8) corresponds to decorative symbol 8. It has become.

Thus, if you want to start the fluctuation from the decorative pattern stopped at "767" (see image P1A), set 6 to the variable ZugaraL, L3 = GAZOU (6 + 2) = GAZOU (8), L2 = GAZOU (6 + 1). = GAZOU (7), L1 = GAZOU (6), L0 = GAZOU (6-1) = GAZOU (5). Then, when 5 is set in the variable ZugaraC, C3 = GAZOU (5 + 2) = GAZOU (7), C2 = GAZOU (5 + 1) = GAZOU (6), C1 = GAZOU (5), C0 = GAZOU (5-1) = It becomes GAZOU (4). Further, when 6 is set in the variable ZugaraR, R3 = GAZOU (6 + 2) = GAZOU (8), R2 = GAZOU (6 + 1) = GAZOU (7), R1 = GAZOU (6), R0 = GAZOU (6-1) = It becomes GAZOU (5). As a result, when this value is applied to the scene shown in FIG. 23 (a-1), the variable display as shown in FIG. 27 (b-1) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, when the above values are applied to the scene shown in FIG. 23 (b-1), the variable display as shown in FIG. 27 (b-2) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Then, when the above values are applied to the scene shown in FIG. 23 (c-1), the variable display as shown in FIG. 27 (b-3) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, when the above values are applied to the scene shown in FIG. 23 (d-1), the variable display as shown in FIG. 27 (b-4) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, in this way, all the scenes shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to (d-1) are used, and when the scene returned to the scene shown in FIG. It is incremented (+1) with ZugaraC + 1 and variable ZugaraR = ZugaraR + 1, so 7 (= 6 + 1) is set in the variable ZugaraL, 6 (= 5 + 1) is set in the variable ZugaraC, and 7 (= 6 + 1) is set in the variable ZugaraR. Will be done. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (7 + 2) = GAZOU (0), L2 = GAZOU (7 + 1) = GAZOU (8), L1 = GAZOU (7), L0 = GAZOU (7-1) = GAZOU (6), C3 = GAZOU (6 + 2) = GAZOU (8), C2 = GAZOU (6 + 1) = GAZOU (7), C1 = GAZOU (6), C0 = GAZOU (6-1) = GAZOU (5), R3 = GAZOU (7 + 2) = GAZOU (0), R2 = GAZOU (7 + 1) = GAZOU (8), R1 = GAZOU (7), R0 = GAZOU (7-1) = GAZOU (6). As a result, when this value is applied to the scene shown in FIG. 23 (a-1), the variable display as shown in FIG. 27 (b-5) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. If the value becomes 9 as described above, division or the like may be performed so that the value becomes 0. Further, in FIGS. 27 (b-1) to (b-5), only the numbers are shown, but on the liquid crystal display device 41, decorations such as sunny and cloudy as shown in FIG. 27 (a) are also combined with the numbers. Will be displayed.

Thus, by sequentially using the scenes shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to (d-1) and returning to the scene shown in FIG. 23 (a-1), the variables ZugaraL, the variable ZugaraC, and the variable ZugaraR If the values are incremented by 1, the displayed symbols will be replaced, and the symbols will appear to be scrolling in sequence.

Here, in more detail, the method using the scenes shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to 23 (d-1) is described by using the fluctuation start sequence table X, Y, Z, the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, and deceleration. The fluctuation sequence tables X, Y, and Z will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 24A, in the fluctuation start sequence table X, ZugaraL = STOP_L0 (STOP_L0 = 6) is set so that the fluctuation is started from the stop symbol “767” of the previous fluctuation. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (6 + 2) = GAZOU (8), L2 = GAZOU (6 + 1) = GAZOU (7), L1 = GAZOU (6), L0 = GAZOU (6-1) = GAZOU (5). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the tenth frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene X1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the variation start sequence table X, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 11th frame to the 20th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table X, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 21st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 21st frame to the 30th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table X, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 31st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 31st frame to the 40th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24A, in the fluctuation start sequence table X, in order to update the symbol number in the 41st frame, ZugalaL = ZugalaL + 1 is set, and the value of ZugalaL is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugalaL = 7 is set. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (7 + 2) = GAZOU (0), L2 = GAZOU (7 + 1) = GAZOU (8), L1 = GAZOU (7), L0 = GAZOU (7-1) = GAZOU (6). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 41st frame to the 50th frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene X1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table X, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 51st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 51st frame to the 60th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table X, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 61st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 61st frame to the 70th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table X, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 71st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 71st frame to the 80th frame. The timer of the fluctuation sequence table X is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25A, in the fluctuation start sequence table Y, ZugaraC = STOP_C0 (STOP_C0 = 5) is set so that the fluctuation is started from the stop symbol “767” of the previous fluctuation. As a result, C3 = GAZOU (5 + 2) = GAZOU (7), C2 = GAZOU (5 + 1) = GAZOU (6), C1 = GAZOU (5), C0 = GAZOU (5-1) = GAZOU (4). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the tenth frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the variation start sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 11th frame to the 20th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 21st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 21st frame to the 30th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 31st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 31st frame to the 40th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Y, in order to update the symbol number in the 41st frame, ZugaraC = ZugaraC + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraC is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraC = 6 is set. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (6 + 2) = GAZOU (8), L2 = GAZOU (6 + 1) = GAZOU (7), L1 = GAZOU (6), L0 = GAZOU (6-1) = GAZOU (5). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 41st frame to the 50th frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 51st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 51st frame to the 60th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 61st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 61st frame to the 70th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 71st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 71st frame to the 80th frame. The timer of the fluctuation sequence table Y is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26A, in the fluctuation start sequence table Z, ZugaraR = STOP_R0 (STOP_R0 = 6) is set so that the fluctuation is started from the stop symbol “767” of the previous fluctuation. As a result, R3 = GAZOU (6 + 2) = GAZOU (8), R2 = GAZOU (6 + 1) = GAZOU (7), R1 = GAZOU (6), R0 = GAZOU (6-1) = GAZOU (5). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the tenth frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Z1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the variation start sequence table Z, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 11th frame to the 20th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Z, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 21st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 21st frame to the 30th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Z, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 31st frame, and thus, The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 31st frame to the 40th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26A, in the fluctuation start sequence table Z, in order to update the symbol number in the 41st frame, ZugaraR = ZugaraR + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraR is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraR = 7 is set. As a result, R3 = GAZOU (7 + 2) = GAZOU (0), R2 = GAZOU (7 + 1) = GAZOU (8), R1 = GAZOU (7), R0 = GAZOU (7-1) = GAZOU (6). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 41st frame to the 50th frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Z1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Z, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 51st frame, and thus, The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 51st frame to the 60th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Z, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 61st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 61st frame to the 70th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the fluctuation start sequence table Z, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) in the 71st frame, and thus, The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 71st frame to the 80th frame. The timer of the fluctuation sequence table Z is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such fluctuation start sequence tables X, Y, Z are set at the timing T1A, which is the first frame, as shown in the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)). Up to the 80th frame, the processing of the left decorative symbol based on the contents of the variation start sequence table X, the processing of the middle decorative symbol based on the contents of the variation start sequence table Y, and the right decorative symbol based on the contents of the variation start sequence table Z. Will be processed. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the variable display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (e) from the timing T1A to the timing T2A shown in FIG. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

As shown in FIG. 24B, in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, the variable ZugalaL used in the fluctuation start sequence table X is inherited as it is and the left decorative symbol is changed, so that only the symbol number is updated. That is, ZugalaL = ZugalaL + 1, and the value of ZugalaL is incremented (+1). Then, the incremented ZugaraL value is substituted into L3 = GAZOU (ZugaraL + 2), L2 = GAZOU (ZugaraL + 1), L1 = GAZOU (ZugaraL), and L0 = GAZOU (ZugaraL-1). As a result, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first to third frames in FIG. 23 (a-). The symbol of the symbol variation scene X1 shown in 1) will be displayed. At this time, the VDP 803 also performs a process of making the left decorative pattern translucent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) in the fourth frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 4th frame to the 6th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 7th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 7th frame to the 9th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 10th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 10th frame to the 12th frame.

When the left decorative symbol is changed at high speed even after the 12th frame, the process is repeated by returning to the first (first frame). That is, the number of frames in which the left decorative symbol is switched by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X (the left decorative symbol displayed at the stop position is switched when scrolling) requires 12 frames. On the other hand, the timer of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y, the variable ZugaraC used in the fluctuation start sequence table Y is inherited as it is to change the intermediate decorative symbol, so that only the symbol number is updated. .. That is, ZugaraC = ZugaraC + 1, and the value of ZugaraC is incremented (+1). Then, the incremented ZugaraC value is substituted into C3 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 2), C2 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 1), C1 = GAZOU (ZugaraC), and C0 = GAZOU (ZugaraC-1). As a result, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first to third frames in FIG. 23 (a-). The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in 1) will be displayed. At this time, the VDP 803 also performs a process of making the intermediate decorative pattern translucent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) in the fourth frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 4th frame to the 6th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 7th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 7th frame to the 9th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 10th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 10th frame to the 12th frame.

When the intermediate decorative pattern is changed at high speed even after the 12th frame, the process is repeated by returning to the first (first frame). That is, the number of frames in which the intermediate decorative symbol is switched by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y (the intermediate decorative symbol displayed at the stop position is switched when scrolling) requires 12 frames. On the other hand, the timer of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26B, in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z, the variable ZugaraR used in the fluctuation start sequence table Z is inherited as it is and the right decorative symbol is changed, so that only the symbol number is updated. .. That is, ZugaraR = ZugaraR + 1, and the value of ZugaraR is incremented (+1). Then, the incremented ZugaraR value is substituted into R3 = GAZOU (ZugaraR + 2), R2 = GAZOU (ZugaraR + 1), R1 = GAZOU (ZugaraR), and R0 = GAZOU (ZugaraR-1). As a result, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first to third frames in FIG. 23 (a-). The symbol of the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in 1) will be displayed. At this time, the VDP 803 also performs a process of making the right decorative pattern translucent.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) in the fourth frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 4th frame to the 6th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 7th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 7th frame to the 9th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 10th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 10th frame to the 12th frame.

When the right decorative symbol is changed at high speed even after the 12th frame, the process is repeated by returning to the first (first frame). That is, the number of frames in which the right decorative symbol is switched by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z (the middle decorative symbol displayed at the stop position is switched when scrolling) requires 12 frames. On the other hand, the timer of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such high-speed fluctuation sequence tables X, Y, Z are set at timing T2A, which is the 81st frame, as shown in the decorative symbol normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA (see FIG. 21 (c)). Up to the 93rd frame, the processing of the left decorative symbol is performed based on the contents of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the high-speed variation display of the left decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 19 (f) from the timing T2A to the timing T3A shown in FIG. On the other hand, the intermediate decorative symbol is processed based on the contents of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y up to the 273rd frame. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the high-speed variation display of the intermediate decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (f) to 19 (l) from the timing T2A to the timing T6A shown in FIG. On the other hand, the right decorative symbol is processed based on the contents of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z up to the 183rd frame. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the high-speed variation display of the right decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (f) to 19 (i) from the timing T2A to the timing T4A shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, a process of changing the left decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation to a symbol displayed at the timing of deceleration according to the stop symbol is performed. Specifically, the stop symbol-3 is set in the variable ZugaraL in order to start deceleration three frames before the stop symbol. That is, it is set by ZugaraL = STOP_L1-3, and in this embodiment, the stop symbol is "253", so 1 is set in STOP_L1. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (7 + 2) = GAZOU (0), L2 = GAZOU (7 + 1) = GAZOU (8), L1 = GAZOU (7), L0 = GAZOU (7-1) = GAZOU (6). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the seventh frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene X1 will be displayed. Although ZugalaL is "-2", it is processed as "7" by performing a process such as division in order to make it a value of 0 to 8.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 8th frame, and thus, The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 8th frame to the 14th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 15th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 15th frame to the 21st frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 22nd frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 22nd frame to the 28th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, in order to update the symbol number at the 29th frame, ZugaraL = ZugaraL + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraL is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugalaL = 8 is set. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (8 + 2) = GAZOU (1), L2 = GAZOU (8 + 1) = GAZOU (0), L1 = GAZOU (8), L0 = GAZOU (8-1) = GAZOU (7). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 29th frame to the 35th frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene X1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 36th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 36th frame to the 42nd frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 43rd frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 43rd frame to the 49th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 50th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 50th frame to the 56th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, in order to update the symbol number at the 57th frame, ZugaraL = ZugaraL + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraL is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraL = 0 is set. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (0 + 2) = GAZOU (2), L2 = GAZOU (0 + 1) = GAZOU (1), L1 = GAZOU (0), L0 = GAZOU (0-1) = GAZOU (8). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 57th frame to the 63rd frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene X1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 64th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 64th frame to the 70th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 71st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 71st frame to the 77th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 78th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 78th frame to the 84th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, in order to update the symbol number at the 85th frame, ZugaraL = ZugaraL + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraL is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraL = 1 is set. As a result, L3 = GAZOU (1 + 2) = GAZOU (3), L2 = GAZOU (1 + 1) = GAZOU (2), L1 = GAZOU (1), L0 = GAZOU (1-1) = GAZOU (0). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the symbol of the symbol variation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1). Will be displayed. The timer of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such a deceleration variation sequence table X is set at the timing T3A, which is the 94th frame, as shown in the normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)), and at the timing T3Aa (see FIG. 21C). Up to one frame before (see FIG. 20), the processing of the left decorative symbol is performed based on the contents of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the deceleration fluctuation display of the left decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (g) to 19 (h) from the timing T3A to the timing T3Aa shown in FIG. That is, the number of frames in which the left decorative symbol is switched by the deceleration fluctuation sequence X (the left decorative symbol displayed at the stop position is switched when scrolling) requires 28 frames. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, a process of changing the intermediate decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation to a symbol displayed at the timing of deceleration according to the stop symbol is performed. Specifically, the stop symbol-3 is set in the variable ZugaraC in order to start deceleration three frames before the stop symbol. That is, it is set by ZugaraC = STOP_C1-3, and in this embodiment, the stop symbol is "253", so 4 is set in STOP_C1. As a result, C3 = GAZOU (1 + 2) = GAZOU (3), C2 = GAZOU (1 + 1) = GAZOU (2), C1 = GAZOU (1), C0 = GAZOU (1-1) = GAZOU (0). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the seventh frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 8th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 8th frame to the 14th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 15th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 15th frame to the 21st frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 22nd frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 22nd frame to the 28th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, in order to update the symbol number in the 29th frame, ZugaraC = ZugaraC + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraC is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraC = 2 is set. As a result, C3 = GAZOU (2 + 2) = GAZOU (4), C2 = GAZOU (2 + 1) = GAZOU (3), C1 = GAZOU (2), C0 = GAZOU (2-1) = GAZOU (1). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 29th frame to the 35th frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 36th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 36th frame to the 42nd frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 43rd frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 43rd frame to the 49th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 50th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 50th frame to the 56th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, in order to update the symbol number at the 57th frame, ZugaraC = ZugaraC + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraC is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraC = 3 is set. As a result, C3 = GAZOU (3 + 2) = GAZOU (5), C2 = GAZOU (3 + 1) = GAZOU (4), C1 = GAZOU (3), C0 = GAZOU (3-1) = GAZOU (2). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 57th frame to the 63rd frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 64th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 64th frame to the 70th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 71st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 71st frame to the 77th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 78th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 78th frame to the 84th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y, in order to update the symbol number at the 85th frame, ZugaraC = ZugaraC + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraC is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraC = 4 is set. As a result, C3 = GAZOU (4 + 2) = GAZOU (6), C2 = GAZOU (4 + 1) = GAZOU (5), C1 = GAZOU (4), C0 = GAZOU (4-1) = GAZOU (3). Then, this value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1), so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1). Will be displayed. The timer of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such a deceleration variation sequence table Y is set at the timing T5A, which is the 274th frame, as shown in the decorative symbol normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA (see FIG. 21 (c)), and at the timing T5Aa (see FIG. 21C). Up to one frame before (see FIG. 20), the processing of the intermediate decorative symbol is performed based on the contents of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the deceleration fluctuation display of the intermediate decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (m) to 19 (n) from the timing T5A to the timing T5Aa shown in FIG. That is, the number of frames in which the intermediate decorative symbol is switched by the deceleration fluctuation sequence Y (the intermediate decorative symbol displayed at the stop position when scrolling is switched) requires 28 frames. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, a process of changing the right decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation to a symbol displayed at the timing of deceleration according to the stop symbol is performed. Specifically, the stop symbol-3 is set in the variable ZugaraR in order to start deceleration three frames before the stop symbol. That is, it is set by ZugaraR = STOP_R1-3, and in the present embodiment, the stop symbol is "253", so 2 is set in STOP_R1. As a result, R3 = GAZOU (8 + 2) = GAZOU (1), R2 = GAZOU (8 + 1) = GAZOU (0), R1 = GAZOU (8), R0 = GAZOU (8-1) = GAZOU (7). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the seventh frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Z1 will be displayed. Although ZugaraR is "-1", it is processed as "8" by performing a process such as division in order to make it a value of 0 to 8.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 8th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 8th frame to the 14th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 15th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 15th frame to the 21st frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 22nd frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 22nd frame to the 28th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, in order to update the symbol number in the 29th frame, ZugaraR = ZugaraR + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraR is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraR = 0 is set. As a result, R3 = GAZOU (0 + 2) = GAZOU (2), R2 = GAZOU (0 + 1) = GAZOU (1), R1 = GAZOU (0), R0 = GAZOU (0-1) = GAZOU (8). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 29th frame to the 35th frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Z1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 36th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 36th frame to the 42nd frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 43rd frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 43rd frame to the 49th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 50th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 50th frame to the 56th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, in order to update the symbol number at the 57th frame, ZugaraR = ZugaraR + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraR is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraR = 1 is set. As a result, R3 = GAZOU (1 + 2) = GAZOU (3), R2 = GAZOU (1 + 1) = GAZOU (2), R1 = GAZOU (1), R0 = GAZOU (1-1) = GAZOU (0). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 57th frame to the 63rd frame in FIG. 23 (a-1). ), The symbol of the symbol variation scene Z1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 64th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 64th frame to the 70th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by the VDP 803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) in the 71st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 71st frame to the 77th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol fluctuation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 78th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 78th frame to the 84th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z, in order to update the symbol number at the 85th frame, ZugaraR = ZugaraR + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraR is incremented (+1). Therefore, ZugaraR = 2 is set. As a result, R3 = GAZOU (2 + 2) = GAZOU (4), R2 = GAZOU (2 + 1) = GAZOU (3), R1 = GAZOU (2), R0 = GAZOU (2-1) = GAZOU (1). Then, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the symbol of the symbol variation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1). Will be displayed. The timer of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such a deceleration variation sequence table Z is set at the timing T4A, which is the 184th frame, as shown in the normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)), and at the timing T4Aa (see FIG. 21C). Up to one frame before (see FIG. 20), the processing of the right decorative symbol is performed based on the contents of the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the deceleration fluctuation display of the right decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (j) to 19 (k) from the timing T4A to the timing T4Aa shown in FIG. That is, the number of frames in which the right decorative symbol is switched by the deceleration fluctuation sequence Z (the left decorative symbol displayed at the stop position when scrolling is switched) requires 28 frames. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

By the way, after the deceleration fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is performed as described above, the symbol stops, or the sway fluctuation, which is not completely stopped but is synonymous with the stopped state, is performed. In the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for the decorative pattern shown in 21 (c), the shaking fluctuation is performed. Therefore, in the following, this fluctuation will be described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 23 (a-2) to 23 (d-2), the region where the liquid crystal display device 41 shakes and fluctuates is predetermined. That is, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a-2) to 23 (d-2), four scenes are prepared as display modes of the decorative symbol in which the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the fluctuation of shaking. Of the four scenes, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (a-2), a shaking fluctuation scene X1, a shaking fluctuation scene Y1, and a shaking fluctuation scene Z1 are prepared. In the shaking fluctuation scene X1, the object L1 is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, in the shaking fluctuation scene Y1, the object C1 is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, and in the shaking fluctuation scene Z1, the object R1 is located. It is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (b-2), a shaking fluctuation scene X2, a shaking fluctuation scene Y2, and a shaking fluctuation scene Z2 are prepared. In the shaking fluctuation scene X2, the object L1 is located slightly above the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, and in the shaking fluctuation scene Y2, the object C1 is located slightly above the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41. In Z2, the object R1 is located slightly above the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (c-2), a shaking fluctuation scene X3, a shaking fluctuation scene Y3, and a shaking fluctuation scene Z3 are prepared. In the shaking fluctuation scene X3, the object L1 is located on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 41, in the shaking fluctuation scene Y3, the object C1 is located on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 41, and in the shaking fluctuation scene Z3, the object R1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is located above the device 41.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 23 (d-2), a shaking fluctuation scene X4, a shaking fluctuation scene Y4, and a shaking fluctuation scene Z4 are prepared. In the shaking fluctuation scene X4, the object L1 is located slightly closer to the center portion than the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 41, and in the shaking fluctuation scene Y4, the object C1 is located slightly closer to the center portion side than the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 41 and shakes. In the variable scene Z4, the object R1 is located slightly closer to the center portion than the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, by repeating the scenes shown in FIGS. 23 (a-2) to 23 (d-2), it is possible to make the decorative pattern appear to sway and fluctuate.

Here, in more detail, the method using the scenes shown in FIGS. 23 (a-2) to 23 (d-2) will be described in detail by explaining the shaking fluctuation sequence tables X, Y, and Z. ..

As shown in FIG. 24 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table X, the symbol set in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X is used as it is, so the symbol number is not changed and the value of L1 = GAZOU (ZugaraL) is set. VDP803 is applied to the shaking fluctuation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-2). As a result, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene X1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-2) from the first frame to the fifth frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the shaking fluctuation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-2) at the sixth frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene X2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-2) from the 6th frame to the 10th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table X, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the shaking fluctuation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-2) at the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene X3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-2) from the 11th frame to the 15th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the shaking fluctuation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-2) at the 16th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene X4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-2) from the 16th frame to the 20th frame.

When the left decorative pattern is shaken and fluctuated even after the 20th frame, the process is repeated by returning to the first (first frame). Further, the timer of the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table X is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such a swing fluctuation sequence table X is set at the timing T3Aa (see FIG. 20) as shown in the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)), and the timings T3Aa to Up to the 363rd frame, the processing of the left decorative symbol is performed based on the contents of the shaking fluctuation sequence table X. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the shaking fluctuation display of the left decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (k) to 19 (o) from the timing T3Aa to the timing T6A shown in FIG. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Y, the symbol set in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Y is used as it is, so the symbol number is not changed and the value of C1 = GAZOU (ZugaraC). Is applied to the shaking fluctuation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-2) by VDP803. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-2) from the first frame to the fifth frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Y, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the shaking fluctuation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-2) at the sixth frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-2) from the 6th frame to the 10th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Y, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the shaking fluctuation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-2) at the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-2) from the 11th frame to the 15th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Y, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the shaking fluctuation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-2) at the 16th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-2) from the 16th frame to the 20th frame.

In addition, when the intermediate decorative pattern is shaken and fluctuated even after the 20th frame, the process is repeated by returning to the first (first frame). Further, the timer of the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table Y is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such a swing fluctuation sequence table Y is set at the timing T5Aa (see FIG. 20) as shown in the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)), and the timings T5Aa to Up to the 363rd frame, the processing of the intermediate decorative pattern is performed based on the contents of the shaking fluctuation sequence table Y. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the fluctuation display of the intermediate decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 19 (o) from the timing T5Aa to the timing T6A shown in FIG. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Z, the symbol set in the deceleration fluctuation sequence table Z is used as it is, so the symbol number is not changed and the value of R1 = GAZOU (ZugaraR). Is applied to the shaking fluctuation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-2) by VDP803. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Z1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-2) from the first frame to the fifth frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Z, the above values are applied by VDP803 to the shaking fluctuation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-2) at the sixth frame, and thus, The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Z2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-2) from the 6th frame to the 10th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Z, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the shaking fluctuation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-2) at the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Z3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-2) from the 11th frame to the 15th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (d), in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Z, the above values are applied by VDP803 to the shaking fluctuation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-2) at the 16th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the shaking fluctuation scene Z4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-2) from the 16th frame to the 20th frame.

When the right decorative pattern is shaken and fluctuated even after the 20th frame, the process is repeated by returning to the first (first frame). Further, the timer of the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table Z is different from the fluctuation scenario timer, and is measured as one frame from the frame at the time of setting.

Thus, such a swing fluctuation sequence table Z is set at the timing T4Aa (see FIG. 20) as shown in the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)), and the timings T4Aa to Up to the 363rd frame, the processing of the right decorative symbol is performed based on the contents of the shaking fluctuation sequence table Z. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the shaking fluctuation display of the right decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 19 (l) to 19 (o) from the timing T4Aa to the timing T6A shown in FIG. .. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

By the way, after the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is performed as described above, the symbol is fixed and therefore stopped. Therefore, in the following, this symbol stop will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 23 (a-3), the area for stopping the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41 is predetermined. That is, as shown in FIG. 23 (a-3), one scene is prepared as a display mode of the decorative symbol in which the symbol stop is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, a symbol stop scene X, a symbol stop scene Y, and a symbol stop scene Z are prepared. In the symbol stop scene X, the object L1 is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, in the symbol stop scene Y, the object C1 is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, and in the symbol stop scene Z, the object R1 is located. It is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, by using such a scene shown in FIG. 23 (a-3), it is possible to make the decorative pattern appear to be stopped.

Here, the method using the scene shown in FIG. 23 (a-3) will be described in more detail by explaining the fluctuation stop sequence tables X, Y, and Z.

As shown in FIG. 24 (e), in the fluctuation stop sequence table X, the symbol number is set in consideration of the case where the value of the variable ZugaraL becomes an abnormal value due to noise during the deceleration fluctuation of the left decorative symbol. Specifically, it is set by ZugaraL = STOP_L1, and in the present embodiment, the stop symbol is "253", so 1 is set in STOP_L1. As a result, L1 = GAZOU (1), and this value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol stop scene X shown in FIG. 23 (a-3), so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has FIG. 23 (a-3). ) Will be displayed. The symbol of the symbol stop scene X will be displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), in the fluctuation stop sequence table Y, the symbol number is set in consideration of the case where the value of the variable ZugaraC becomes an abnormal value due to noise during the deceleration fluctuation of the intermediate decorative symbol. Specifically, it is set by ZugaraC = STOP_C1, and in this embodiment, the stop symbol is "253", so 4 is set in STOP_C1. As a result, C1 = GAZOU (4), and this value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol stop scene Y shown in FIG. 23 (a-3), so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has FIG. 23 (a-3). ) Will be displayed. The symbol of the symbol stop scene Y will be displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), in the fluctuation stop sequence table Z, the symbol number is set in consideration of the case where the value of the variable ZugaraR becomes an abnormal value due to noise during the deceleration fluctuation of the right decorative symbol. .. Specifically, it is set by ZugaraR = STOP_R1, and in the present embodiment, the stop symbol is "253", so 2 is set in STOP_R1. As a result, R1 = GAZOU (2), and this value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol stop scene Z shown in FIG. 23 (a-3), so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has FIG. 23 (a-3). ) Will be displayed. The symbol of the symbol stop scene Z will be displayed.

Thus, such fluctuation stop sequence tables X, Y, Z are set and fluctuate at the timing T6A, which is the 364th frame, as shown in the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)). The left decorative symbol is processed based on the contents of the stop sequence table X, the middle decorative symbol is processed based on the contents of the variable stop sequence table Y, and the right decorative symbol is processed based on the contents of the variable stop sequence table Z. Will be processed. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the display of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 19 (p) at the timing T6A shown in FIG. Although only the numbers are shown in the figure, the liquid crystal display device 41 also displays decorations such as sunny weather and cloudy weather as shown in FIG. 27 (a) together with the numbers.

Thus, while the decorative symbol is subjected to the variation effect based on the variation content of the variation pattern and the normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA (see FIG. 21C) for the decorative symbol according to the time. , The resident symbol is not based on the normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 21 (c)), but the resident symbol is switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals to execute the variation effect. .. Further, both the decorative symbol and the resident symbol start the variation effect when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received by the sub control CPU 800a. I am doing it.

By making the method of changing the decorative symbol and the resident symbol different in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the decorative symbol and the resident symbol. Furthermore, since the variable effect is executed only by switching the resident symbol, the control can be simplified.

Further, the decorative symbol changes according to the fluctuation start sequence table X, Y, Z, the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, and the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z. It has become. Therefore, there are multiple timings for switching decorative patterns. Further, the resident symbols change according to the resident symbol change start sequence tables L, C, R and the resident symbol changing sequence tables L, C, R. Therefore, there are multiple timings for switching the resident symbol. However, since the decorative symbols that the player pays attention to require playability and it is necessary to clarify that the resident symbols are changing, there are multiple timings for switching the symbols according to the characteristics of each symbol. By making it possible, fluctuation control can be performed efficiently.

On the other hand, when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a-1) to (d-1), the decorative symbol is scrolled from the previously stopped symbol in a variable region wider than the size of the decorative symbol. I try to fluctuate. Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, the resident symbol is set to fluctuate in substantially the same fluctuation region as the displayed size. However, since the purpose of the resident symbol is to clarify that it is changing, it is not necessary to scroll the resident symbol as in the decorative symbol. Therefore, the resident symbol need only fluctuate in a display area that is substantially the same as the size of the symbol. Therefore, unlike the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the resident symbol is varied in a variable region that is substantially the same as the displayed size, so that another variable region is not required. It can be displayed so as not to interfere with the liquid crystal display.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the resident symbol has been described so as to be resident and displayed during the period displayed in the fluctuation content of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result and the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display may be continued even when the fluctuation is stopped and the so-called customer waiting state in which there is no hold to be changed next is reached. Further, when the customer waiting demo effect is displayed, the resident symbol may be hidden. However, by hiding it in this way, the player can clearly recognize that the displayed content is not a variable effect. Furthermore, it may be hidden even during the big hit. However, according to this, the player can clearly recognize that the fluctuation has ended and the jackpot state has been reached, and further, the jackpot has ended and the fluctuation effect has resumed by redisplaying the resident symbol. It is possible to make the player recognize that it will be done.

By the way, in the present embodiment, at the timing T6A shown in FIG. 20, when the symbol determination command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received by the sub control CPU 800a, FIG. 21 An example is shown in which the fluctuation stop sequence tables X, Y, and Z are set in the normal fluctuation 12-second fluctuation scenario SS_DATA for the decorative symbol shown in (c), but the symbol confirmation command is the main control board 60 (main control). If it is not transmitted from the CPU 600a), the fluctuation stop sequence tables X, Y, and Z may be set when the fluctuation scenario timer reaches a value indicating 364 frames. Further, regarding the resident symbol variation scenario ZS_DATA shown in FIG. 21 (b), if the symbol confirmation command is not transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), it changes to the decorative symbol normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA. When the stop sequence tables X, Y, and Z are set, the resident symbol fluctuation stop sequence tables L, C, and R may be set in the resident symbol variation scenario ZS_DATA.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the decorative pattern is changed at high speed, the process of making it semi-transparent is performed, but the process of making it semi-transparent does not have to be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when updating the resident symbol, an example of incrementing (+1) after a predetermined time is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decrementing (-1) may be performed. Also, instead of incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1) all of the resident symbols, two of the three resident symbols may be incremented (+1) and the remaining one may be decremented (-1). ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the case of normal fluctuation has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to reach fluctuation. This point will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33. Since the variation effect shown in FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (h) is subjected to the same processing up to the timings T1A to T4Aa shown in FIG. 20 described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, at the timing T5Ab shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for notifying the reach to the liquid crystal display device 41 to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (i), the characters "reach!" Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 (see image P40A).

Further, at the timing T5Ab shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the intermediate decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 28 (j) to 28 (k), an image in which the intermediate decorative symbols (see images P41Ab and P42Ab) are decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 28 (j), an image in which the intermediate decorative symbol (see image P41Ab) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further shown in FIG. 28 (k). As described above, the image in which the intermediate decorative pattern (see image P42Ab) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T5Ac shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control CPU 800a changes the left and right decorative symbols to numerical symbols, and transmits a command list for changing the intermediate decorative symbols at high speed to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (l), the left decorative symbol (see image P43Aa) and the right decorative symbol (see image P43Ac) are changed to numerical symbols, and the middle decorative symbol (see image P43Ab) fluctuates at high speed. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for displaying the left and right decorative symbols in the upper corner of the screen to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (m), the left decorative symbol of the numerical symbol (see image P44Aa) is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the right decorative symbol of the numerical symbol (see image P44Ac) is liquid crystal. It will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the display device 41.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for notifying the liquid crystal display device 41 of the SP reach to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (n), the characters "SP reach" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 (see image P45A).

However, in this way, the decorative symbol is changed to only the numerical symbol after the reach effect occurs, while the resident symbol continues to fluctuate only with the numerical symbol, and even if the reach effect occurs, it does not change. Continue to do. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the resident symbol.

By the way, the processing of the variation effect as described above includes the normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols, the tempai time variation scenario SS2_DATA for decorative symbols, and the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols shown in FIG. 30 (a). This is done using the resident symbol variation scenario ZS_DATA. The normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols, the tempai time variation scenario SS2_DATA for decorative symbols, and the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols are shown in FIG. 9A stored in the sub-control ROM 800b, respectively. It is one of a plurality of production scenario data PS_DATA. The resident symbol variation scenario ZS_DATA is the same as the one described above, and therefore has the same reference numeral.

The normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols is a variation start sequence table from the timing T1A to the 80th frame, which is the first frame, as shown in FIG. 30B when the left decorative symbol is subjected to variation processing as described above. Processing is performed in X, processing is performed in the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X from the timing T2A time to the 81st frame to the 93rd frame, and processing is performed in the timing T3A time to the timing T3Aa time (see FIG. 20) in the 94th frame. Processing is performed by the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X until before the frame, and processing is performed by the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table X from the timing T3Aa (see FIG. 20).

Then, when the intermediate decorative symbol is subjected to the variation processing as described above, as shown in FIG. 30B, the variation start sequence table Y is used to perform the variation processing from the timing T1A to the 80th frame, which is the first frame. Processing is performed by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Y from the timing T2A, which is the 81st frame.

Further, when the right decorative symbol is subjected to the variation processing as described above, as shown in FIG. 30B, the variation start sequence table Z is used to perform the variation processing from the timing T1A to the 80th frame, which is the first frame. Processing is performed by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table Z from the timing T2A to the 183rd frame, which is the 81st frame, and the deceleration fluctuation sequence table is performed from the timing T4A to the timing T4Aa (see FIG. 20), which is the 184th frame. The processing is performed in Z, and the processing is performed in the shaking fluctuation sequence table Z from the timing T4Aa (see FIG. 20).

Thus, by using such a normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the variation display of the decorative symbols as shown in FIGS. 28 (b) to 28 (h).

Tempai fluctuation scenario SS2_DATA for decorative symbols is processed by the shaking fluctuation sequence table X from the first frame at the timing T5Ab as shown in FIG. 30 (c) when the left decorative symbol is subjected to fluctuation processing as described above. Is supposed to do.

Then, in performing the variation processing of the intermediate decorative pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), the processing is performed on the tempai time variation sequence table Y from the first frame at the timing T5Ab. ..

Further, when the right decorative symbol is subjected to the variation processing as described above, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), the variation processing is performed by the shaking variation sequence table Z from the first frame at the timing T5Ab.

Thus, by using such a decorative pattern tempai time variation scenario SS2_DATA, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the variation display of the decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 28 (j) to 28 (k). .. In the present embodiment, in the tempai time fluctuation scenario SS2_DATA for decorative symbols, in order to shake and fluctuate the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, the processing is performed by the fluctuation fluctuation sequence tables X and Z, but the processing is limited to this. Instead, the fluctuation may be stopped without shaking.

In the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols, when the left decorative symbol is varied as described above, as shown in FIG. 30 (d), from the first frame at the timing T5Ac to the reach development sequence table X. It is designed to process.

Then, in performing the variation processing of the intermediate decorative pattern as described above, as shown in FIG. 30D, the processing is performed on the high-speed variation sequence table Y from the first frame at the timing T5Ac.

Further, when the right decorative symbol is subjected to the variation processing as described above, as shown in FIG. 30D, the processing is performed on the reach development sequence table Z from the first frame at the timing T5Ac. ..

Thus, by using the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the variation display of the decorative symbols as shown in FIGS. 28 (l) to 28 (m). Become.

Here, the tempai time variation sequence table Y and the reach development sequence tables X and Z will be described in detail. Since the fluctuation start sequence table X, Y, Z, the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z, and the fluctuation fluctuation sequence table X, Y, Z are the same as those described above. , The description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the tempai time fluctuation sequence table Y performs a process of changing the intermediate decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation to a symbol displayed at the timing of deceleration according to the stop symbol. Specifically, the reach symbol (left and right decoration) is to decelerate from -1 frame before the symbol that the middle decorative symbol hits when it reaches the reach, pass through the hit symbol, and fluctuate at high speed to develop into SP reach. In order to start deceleration from one frame before the symbol), the left decorative symbol-1 is set in the variable ZugaraC. That is, the values of ZugaraC = STOP_L1-1 are substituted into C3 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 2), C2 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 1), C1 = GAZOU (ZugaraC), and C0 = GAZOU (ZugaraC-1). As a result, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the tenth frame in FIG. 23 (a-). The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in 1) will be displayed. In this embodiment, the example in which the left decorative symbol-1 is set in the variable ZugaraC is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the right decorative symbol-1 may be set in the variable ZugalaC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 11th frame to the 20th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 21st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 21st frame to the 30th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 31st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 31st frame to the 40th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, in order to update the symbol number in the 41st frame, ZugaraC = ZugaraC + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraC is incremented (+1). That is, the incremented (+1) ZugaraC value is assigned to C3 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 2), C2 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 1), C1 = GAZOU (ZugaraC), and C0 = GAZOU (ZugaraC-1). As a result, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 41st to 50th frames in FIG. 23 (a-). The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in 1) will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 51st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 51st frame to the 60th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 61st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 61st frame to the 70th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) in the 71st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 71st frame to the 80th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, in order to update the symbol number at the 81st frame, ZugaraC = ZugaraC + 1 is set, and the value of ZugaraC is incremented (+1). That is, the incremented (+1) ZugaraC value is assigned to C3 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 2), C2 = GAZOU (ZugaraC + 1), C1 = GAZOU (ZugaraC), and C0 = GAZOU (ZugaraC-1). As a result, this value is applied to the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1) by the VDP 803, so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the 81st to 90th frames in FIG. 23 (a-). The symbol of the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in 1) will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) at the 91st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1) from the 91st frame to the 100th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) at the 101st frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1) from the 101st frame to the 110th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the tempai time variation sequence table Y, the above value is applied by VDP803 to the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) at the 111th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the symbol of the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) from the 111th frame to the 120th frame.

Thus, such a tempai time variation sequence table Y is set at the timing T5Ab as shown in the decorative symbol tempai time variation scenario SS2_DATA (see FIG. 30C), whereby the tempai time variation sequence table Y is set. The processing of the middle decoration pattern will be performed based on the content. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the deceleration fluctuation display of the intermediate decorative symbol as shown in FIGS. 28 (j) to 28 (k). Further, as described above, the number of frames in which the intermediate decorative symbol is switched by the tempai time variation sequence table Y (the intermediate decorative symbol displayed at the stop position is switched when scrolling) requires 40 frames. Therefore, in the normal fluctuation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols, the number of frames required to switch by the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X / Y / Z (12 frames) and the number of frames required to switch by the deceleration fluctuation sequence table X / Z (28 frames). ) Will be longer. That is, the variable scroll at the time of tempai gives the player a feeling of expectation whether the medium decorative symbol stops at the hit symbol or develops into SP reach, so that the number of frames required for the decorative symbol to switch during normal fluctuation is increased. become longer.

On the other hand, at the time of reach development, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), the area of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is predetermined. That is, as shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), four scenes are prepared as display modes of the decorative design displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. Regarding the intermediate decorative symbols, the symbol variation scene Y1 shown in FIG. 23 (a-1), the symbol variation scene Y2 shown in FIG. 23 (b-1), and the symbol variation scene Y3 shown in FIG. 23 (c-1). Since the symbol variation scene Y4 shown in FIG. 23 (d-1) is used, the description thereof will be omitted.

Of the four scenes shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), in the scene shown in FIG. 31 (a), a reach development scene X1 and a reach development scene Z1 are prepared. In the reach development scene X1, the object L1 is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, and in the reach development scene Z1, the object R1 is located in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 31B, a reach development scene X2 and a reach development scene Z2 are prepared. In the reach development scene X2, the object L1 is located slightly above the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41, and in the reach development scene Z1, the object R1 is located slightly above the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 41. ..

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 31C, a reach development scene X3 and a reach development scene Z3 are prepared. In the reach development scene X3, the frame of the object L1 is smaller than the scenes shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (b) and is located above the liquid crystal display device 41. In the reach development scene Z3, the object R1 is located. The frame is smaller than the scenes shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), and is located above the liquid crystal display device 41.

On the other hand, in the scene shown in FIG. 31D, a reach development scene X4 and a reach development scene Z4 are prepared. In the reach development scene X4, the frame of the object L1 is smaller than the scenes shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (b) and is located in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 41. The frame of R1 is smaller than the scenes shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), and is located in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 41.

Here, the method of using the scenes shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (d) will be described in more detail by explaining the reach development sequence tables X and Z.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the reach development sequence table X, since the variable ZugaraL used in the swing fluctuation sequence table X is inherited as it is, the symbol number is not updated and is changed to a numerical symbol at the timing T5a. Perform processing. That is, the value of L1 = ZugaraL is applied by VDP803 to the reach development scene X1 shown in FIG. 31 (a), so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the fifth frame, FIG. 31 (a). ) Will be displayed. The symbol of the reach development scene X1 will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the reach development sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the reach development scene X2 shown in FIG. 31 (b) in the sixth frame, and thus, The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the reach development scene X2 shown in FIG. 31B from the 6th frame to the 10th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the reach development sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the reach development scene X3 shown in FIG. 31 (c) in the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the reach development scene X3 shown in FIG. 31 (c) from the 11th frame to the 15th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the reach development sequence table X, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the reach development scene X4 shown in FIG. 31 (d) at the 16th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the reach development scene X4 shown in FIG. 31 (d) from the 16th frame to the 20th frame.

Thus, such a reach development sequence table X is set at the timing T5Ac as shown in the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 30 (d)), whereby the reach development sequence table X is set. The processing of the left decorative pattern will be performed based on the contents of. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the movement display of the left decorative symbol (see image P43Aa) shown in FIG. 28 (l) and the left decorative symbol (see image P44Aa) shown in FIG. 28 (m). Become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the reach development sequence table Z, the variable ZugaraR used in the swing fluctuation sequence table Z is inherited as it is, so that the symbol number is not updated and is changed to a numerical symbol at the timing T5a. Perform the process to change. That is, the value of R1 = ZugaraR is applied by VDP803 to the reach development scene R1 shown in FIG. 31 (a), so that the liquid crystal display device 41 has the first frame to the fifth frame, FIG. 31 (a). ) Will be displayed with the design of the reach development scene Z1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the reach development sequence table Z, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the reach development scene Z2 shown in FIG. 31 (b) in the sixth frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the reach development scene Z2 shown in FIG. 31B from the 6th frame to the 10th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the reach development sequence table Z, the above values are applied by the VDP 803 to the reach development scene Z3 shown in FIG. 31 (c) in the 11th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the reach development scene Z3 shown in FIG. 31 (c) from the 11th frame to the 15th frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the reach development sequence table Z, the above values are applied by VDP803 to the reach development scene Z4 shown in FIG. 31 (d) at the 16th frame. The liquid crystal display device 41 displays the design of the reach development scene Z4 shown in FIG. 31 (d) from the 16th frame to the 20th frame.

Thus, such a reach development sequence table Z is set at the timing T5Ac as shown in the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols (see FIG. 30 (d)), whereby the reach development sequence table Z is set. The processing of the right decorative pattern will be performed based on the contents of. As a result, the VDP 803 causes the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the movement display of the right decorative symbol (see image P43Ac) shown in FIG. 28 (l) and the right decorative symbol (see image P44Ac) shown in FIG. 28 (m). Become.

Then, in this way, the decorative symbol is changed to only the numerical symbol after the reach effect is generated. On the other hand, the resident symbols continue to fluctuate only with the numerical symbols, and even if the reach effect occurs, they continue to fluctuate without change. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the resident symbol.

Further, in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect, the decorative symbol varies based on a plurality of variation scenarios such as the normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for the decorative symbol, the tempai time variation scenario SS2_DATA for the decorative symbol, and the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for the decorative symbol. Will be done. On the other hand, the resident symbol will fluctuate based on a single fluctuation scenario called the resident symbol fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the decorative symbol and the resident symbol. Further, since the resident symbol changes based on a single fluctuation scenario called the resident symbol fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA, control can be simplified.

By the way, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect, the normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols, the tempai time variation scenario SS2_DATA for decorative symbols, and the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols are exemplified. However, the scenario is not limited to this, and a scenario as shown in FIG. 33 is also used.

That is, as shown in FIG. 33A, when the SP reach per variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the timing T1A (variation start) is used as the variation pattern of the reach effect of the decorative symbol. ) ~ Timing T5Ab, normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols is used, Timing T5Ab ~ Timing T5Ac, Tempai variation scenario SS2_DATA for decorative symbols is used, Timing T5Ac ~ Timing T7A, Reach development variation for decorative symbols Scenario SS3_DATA is used, timing T7A to timing T8A, SP reach fluctuation scenario for decorative symbols SS4_DATA is used, and timing T8A to timing T6A (stop fluctuation), display scenario SS5a_DATA per SP reach for decorative symbols is used. The resident symbol will fluctuate based on a single fluctuation scenario called the resident symbol fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), when the SP reach loss variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), the timing T1A (variation start) to the timing is used as the variation pattern of the reach effect. At T5Ab, the normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols is used, and at timing T5Ab to T5Ac, the tempai time variation scenario SS2_DATA for decorative symbols is used, and at timing T5Ac to timing T7A, the reach development variation scenario SS3_DATA for decorative symbols is used. The SP reach variation scenario SS4_DATA for decorative symbols is used during timing T7A to T8A, and the SP reach loss display scenario SS5b_DATA for decorative symbols is used during timing T8A to timing T6A (variation stop). The resident symbol will fluctuate based on a single fluctuation scenario called the resident symbol fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA.

By the way, the SP reach fluctuation scenario SS4_DATA for decorative symbols is a scenario from becoming SP reach to a symbol that is out of the hit symbol in the medium decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in performing the variation processing of the left decorative symbol, the processing is performed from the timing T7A on the reach-time shaking variation sequence table X. Then, in performing the variation processing of the intermediate decorative symbol, the process is performed in the reach time variation sequence table Y from the first frame to the 599th frame at the timing T7A, and from the 600th frame, the symbol tilt variation sequence table Y is performed. Processing is performed at. Further, in performing the variation processing of the right decorative symbol, the processing is performed from the timing T7A on the reach variation variation sequence table Z. As a result, the SP reach is reached, and the intermediate decorative symbol is processed to be a symbol that is different from the hit symbol.

On the other hand, the SP hit display scenario SS5a_DATA for decorative symbols is a scenario in which the symbol hits the middle decorative symbol, the symbol stops, and the size of the symbol returns to the original size to produce a hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), in performing the variation processing of the left decorative symbol, the effect display sequence table X is set at the 60th frame from the timing T8A, and the effect is produced up to one frame before the timing T6A. Processing is performed in the display sequence table X. Then, at the timing T6A, processing is performed on the fluctuation stop sequence table X.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), in performing the variation processing of the intermediate decorative symbol, the processing is performed in the hit symbol display sequence table Y from the first frame to the 59th frame at the timing T8A, and 60. From the first frame to one frame before the timing T6A, processing is performed on the hit effect display sequence table Y. Then, at the timing T6A, processing is performed on the fluctuation stop sequence table Y.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), in performing the variation processing of the right decorative symbol, the hit effect display sequence table Z is set at the 60th frame from the timing T8A, and the hit effect display sequence is set up to one frame before the timing T6A. Processing is performed in table Z. Then, at the timing T6A, processing is performed on the fluctuation stop sequence table Z.

Thus, by such a process, the symbol hits the intermediate decorative symbol, the symbol stops, and the size of the symbol returns to the original size to produce a hit effect.

On the other hand, the SP off-display scenario SS5b_DATA for decorative symbols is a scenario in which the out-of-order symbols stop at the middle decorative symbols, and the size of the symbols returns to the original size to produce an off-target effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), in performing the variation processing of the left decorative symbol, the out-of-order effect display sequence table X is set at the 60th frame from the timing T8A, and up to one frame before the timing T6A. , The processing is performed in the out-of-order effect display sequence table X. Then, at the timing T6A, processing is performed on the fluctuation stop sequence table X.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), in performing the variation processing of the intermediate decorative symbol, the processing is performed in the out-of-order symbol display sequence table Y from the first frame to the 59th frame at the timing T8A, and 60. From the first frame to one frame before the timing T6A, processing is performed on the out-of-order effect display sequence table Y. Then, at the timing T6A, processing is performed on the fluctuation stop sequence table Y.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), in performing the variation processing of the right decorative symbol, the out-of-order effect display sequence table Z is set in the 60th frame from the timing T8A, and the out-of-order effect is produced up to one frame before the timing T6A. Processing is performed in the display sequence table Z. Then, at the timing T6A, processing is performed on the fluctuation stop sequence table Z.

Thus, by such a process, the design that is out of alignment with the intermediate decorative design is stopped, and the size of the design is restored to the original size to produce the design that is out of alignment.

Thus, in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect, the decorative pattern is varied based on a plurality of scenarios. On the other hand, the resident symbol will fluctuate based on a single fluctuation scenario called the resident symbol fluctuation scenario ZS_DATA.

By the way, when the decorative symbol or the resident symbol as described above changes, the special symbol display device 50 shown in FIG. 5 also displays the variation. When the special symbol display device 50 is variablely displayed, the resident symbol also fluctuates accordingly, but the decorative symbol can be started to fluctuate with a delay of a predetermined time. This point will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. In addition, in FIG. 35, in order to facilitate understanding, only the timing charts of the left resident symbol and the left decorative symbol are shown.

That is, as shown in FIG. 35, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received at the timing T1A, the resident symbol becomes a liquid crystal display device as shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state in which the stop display (see image P50A) is displayed on 41 is changed to the state in which the high-speed fluctuation display (see image P51A) is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (b).

On the other hand, as the decorative design, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the one enlarged and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displayed (see image P52A). This is one of the notice productions using decorative patterns. After that, at the timing T1Aa shown in FIG. 35, the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and at the timing T2A, the high-speed fluctuation display (see image P53A) is performed as shown in FIG. 34 (c).

By the way, even if the advance notice effect using the symbol is generated and the variation of the decorative symbol is started with a delay, by starting the variation of the resident symbol, the player can change the symbol. Can be reliably notified that has started.

In the present embodiment, the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the left decorative symbol is set to stop the fluctuation at the timing T3A, which is the same as the timing shown in FIG. At this time, by adjusting the time of the high-speed fluctuation sequence table X, the fluctuation may be stopped at the timing T3A as in the timing shown in FIG.

<Main control: Program description>
Here, the program used during game processing such as lottery processing, which is stored in the normal program area 600ba of the main control ROM 600b shown in FIG. 8B described above, is stored in the measurement program area 600be of the main control ROM 600b. An outline of a program used for measuring the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the number of prized balls and the number of non-winning balls will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 55.

<Main control: Explanation of main processing>
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power-on signal indicating that the DC voltage generated by the voltage generation unit 1300 of the power supply board 130 (see FIG. 6) is turned on to each control board is sent. In response to the signal, the main control CPU 600a (see FIG. 6) reads out the program stored in the normal program area 600ba of the main control ROM 600b shown in FIG. 8 (b), and reads the program stored in the normal program area 600ba, and the main control main process shown in FIG. I do. At this time, the main control CPU 600a first sets itself in the interrupt disabled state (step S1).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a stack pointer setting process for setting the value of the stack pointer inside the main control CPU 600a corresponding to the final address of the normal stack area 600cc (see FIG. 8A) (step S2). ).

Next, the main control CPU 600a clears the watchdog timer (WDT) (not shown) built in the main control CPU 600a (step S3), and clears the output port that outputs the emission control signal (step S4).

Subsequently, the main control CPU 600a sets the start waiting time of the sub control board 80 (step S5), decrements the set waiting time (-1) (step S6), and clears the watchdog timer (WDT) (not shown). (Step S7).

Next, the main control CPU 600a confirms whether or not the set waiting time has become "0" (step S8), and if it has not become "0" (step S8: ≠ 0), the process returns to the process of step S7. , If it is "0" (step S8: = 0), the process proceeds to step S9.

Next, the main control CPU 600a acquires the voltage abnormality signal ALARM (see FIG. 6) output from the power supply board 130 (voltage monitoring unit 1310) (see FIG. 6) twice, and the voltage abnormality signal ALARM acquired twice. After confirming whether or not the levels of the above are the same, the voltage abnormality signal ALARM is stored in the internal register of the main control CPU 600a (not shown), and the level of the voltage abnormality signal ALARM is confirmed (step S9). Then, if the level of the voltage abnormality signal ALARM is "L" level (step S10: YES), the process returns to the process of step S9, and if the level of the voltage abnormality signal ALARM is "H" level (step S10: NO). The process proceeds to step S11. That is, the main control CPU 600a repeats the same process until the voltage abnormality signal ALARM changes to a normal level (that is, “H” level) (steps S9 to S10). In this way, by acquiring the voltage abnormality signal ALARM twice, an accurate signal can be read.

Next, the main control CPU 600a permits writing of data to the main control RAM 600c (step S11), and initially sets the work area of the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c (step S12). ). Specifically, 00H is set in the power supply abnormality confirmation counter, and 01H is set in the system operation status.

Next, the main control CPU 600a transmits a processing command (effect control command DI_CMD) for displaying the standby screen on the liquid crystal display device 41 on the sub control board 80 (step S13).

Next, the main control CPU 600a clears the watchdog timer (WDT) (not shown) (step S14), and confirms whether or not a signal (power-on signal) indicating that the power has been turned on has arrived from the payout control board 70 (step S14). Step S15). If the power-on signal has not arrived (step S15: OFF), the process returns to step S14, and if the power-on signal has arrived (step S15: ON), the process proceeds to step S16.

Next, the main control CPU 600a acquires the level data of the RAM clear switch 620 and the setting key switch 630, and saves the level data in the working area of the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c (step S16). ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control CPU 600a has an upper opening / closing door 7, a door opening signal indicating whether or not the lower opening door 8 is open, and a normal RAM area 600ca of the main control RAM 600c (FIG. 8 (FIG. 8). The signal of the RAM clear switch 620 saved in the work area of a)) and the signal of the setting key switch 630 are acquired (step S17), and it is confirmed whether or not all of them are turned on (step S18). If all are ON (step S18: YES), the main control CPU 600a performs the setting switching process (step S19).

<Main control: Main processing: Explanation of setting switching processing>
Here, this setting switching process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 38.

First, the main control CPU 600a transmits a setting switching start command (effect control command DI_CMD) indicating that the setting is being changed to the sub control board 80 (step S50).

Next, the main control CPU 600a clears the backup flag (step S51). The backup flag is data indicating whether or not the backup process has been executed when a voltage drop due to a power failure or the like is detected in the power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 39. Further, this backup flag is cleared in order to detect in step S21 shown in FIG. 37, which will be described later, that the main control RAM 600c is not backed up normally due to power failure due to some reason during the setting switching process. Is.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets 02H to the system operation status (step S52), and sets a set value of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player stored in the main control RAM 600c (see FIG. 6). Acquire and set in the W register (step S53). Specifically, when the set value is, for example, "1" to "6", in the program, the set value "1" to "6" corresponds to the value of "00H" to "05H". It will be set in the W register.

Next, the main control CPU 600a compares the value set in the W register with the set maximum value of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "05H" corresponding to "6") (step S54). .. Then, if the value set in the W register of the main control CPU 600a is larger than the set maximum value of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "05H" corresponding to "6") (step S55). : YES), it is determined that the value is abnormal, and 00H is set in the W register (step S56).

On the other hand, if the value set in the W register is smaller than the set maximum value (for example, "05H" corresponding to "6") of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player (step S55: NO), the normal value. Is determined, and the process proceeds to step S57.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets a security signal output to a hall computer (not shown) used for managing the game islands of the game field to ON via an external terminal (not shown), and the security signal is shown in the figure. Output to a hall computer (not shown) via an external terminal (step S57).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets 00H to the LED common port (step S58). As a result, "0" is output from the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2 and the second LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a3 shown in FIG. 7.

Next, the main control CPU 600a outputs the value set in the W register to the LED data port (step S59). As a result, the set value set in the W register is output from the second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2 shown in FIG. 7. Actually, in order to display the set value corresponding to the value set in the W register on the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610 shown in FIG. 7. Data will be output by the LED of. For example, when "00H" is set in the W register, LED data such that "0" is displayed on the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610 is output. Become.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the LED common port for displaying the set value to ON (step S60). As a result, "1" is output from the second LED dynamic lighting common data first signal 611a3a.

Thus, through such processing, the set value is displayed on the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610 shown in FIG. 7. By doing so, the capacity of the program can be reduced.

That is, when changing the setting before the timer interrupt processing described later, a program for creating a cycle for switching the common port is required. However, as described above, only the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610 is actually used, so that the LED data according to the set value can be obtained without switching the common port. I am trying to output. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets a predetermined value in the register in the main control CPU 600a so that a wait of 4 ms is applied, and performs a process of counting down (step S61). In this process, when confirming the change in the level data of the RAM clear switch 620 (see FIG. 6) and the setting key switch 630 (see FIG. 6), it is necessary to wait at least 4 ms from the acquisition of the previous switch level. This is a process for confirming that the level data is not changed due to irregularities such as noise. Furthermore, when the change in the voltage abnormality signal in the subsequent power supply abnormality check process is confirmed and the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is counted, the "L" level of the voltage abnormality signal becomes noise by allowing a time of 4 ms. It is also a process for confirming that the level data is not irregular.

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a power supply abnormality check process (step S62). This power supply abnormality check process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 39.

<Main control: Main processing: Explanation of power supply abnormality check processing>
As shown in FIG. 39, the main control CPU 600a acquires the voltage abnormality signal ALARM (see FIG. 6) output from the power supply board 130 (voltage monitoring unit 1310) (see FIG. 6) twice (step S80). It is confirmed whether or not the levels of the voltage abnormality signals ALARM acquired twice are the same (step S81). If they match (step S81: YES), the main control CPU 600a confirms the level of the voltage abnormality signal ALARM (step S82), and if they do not match (step S81: NO), the process returns to the process of step S80.

Next, if the level of the voltage abnormality signal ALARM is "H" level (step S82: OFF), the main control CPU 600a clears the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S83), and ends the power supply abnormality check process.

On the other hand, if the level of the voltage abnormality signal ALARM is "L" level (step S82: ON), the main control CPU 600a increments (+1) the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S84) and sets the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter. Confirm (step S85). If the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is not 2 or more (step S85: NO), the power supply abnormality check process is completed.

On the other hand, if the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is 2 or more (step S85: YES), the main control CPU 600a transmits a power failure command (effect control command DI_CMD) indicating that the power supply has been cut off to the sub control board 80. (Step S86).

Next, the main control CPU 600a confirms the value of the system operation status (step S87). If the value of the system operation status is 02H, it is determined that the setting change process is in progress (step S87: YES), the backup flag is not set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S89. By doing so, it is possible to detect in step S21 shown in FIG. 37, which will be described later, when the main control RAM 600c is not normally backed up due to power failure due to some reason during the setting switching process.

On the other hand, if the value of the system operation status is not 02H, it is determined that the setting change process is not in progress (step S87: NO), and the backup flag is set to ON (step S88).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the data writing to the main control RAM 600c to the prohibited state (step S89), and clears the output data of all the output ports (step S90). Then, the timer interrupt is disabled (step S91), the infinite loop process is repeated, and the process of waiting for the voltage to drop is performed.

<Main control: Main processing: Explanation of setting switching processing>
Thus, when the power supply abnormality check process (step S62) is completed through the above process, the main control CPU 600a obtains the level data of the RAM clear switch 620 of the previous time and the present time, and the level data of the setting key switch 630. The switch edge data of the RAM clear switch 620 signal and the switch edge data of the setting key switch 630 signal are created (step S63). The main control CPU 600a stores the created edge data in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c.

Next, the main control CPU 600a confirms the edge data stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c, and if the setting key switch 630 is ON (step S64: NO). If the setting key switch 630 is OFF (step S64: YES), the process proceeds to the process of step S67.

Next, if the RAM clear switch 620 is ON (step S65: NO), the main control CPU 600a increments (+1) the value of the W register (step S66), and returns to the process of step S54.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 620 is OFF (step S65: NO), the process returns to the process of step S57.

Thus, the above process is repeated until the setting key switch 630 is turned off, and when the setting key switch 630 is turned off, the main control CPU 600a stores the value of the W register in the main control RAM 600c (see FIG. 6). It overwrites and stores the set value of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, the set value of "00H" to "05H" corresponding to "1" to "6") (step). S67).

Next, the main control CPU 600a outputs the setting confirmation display to the LED data port (step S68). As a result, a value indicating the setting confirmation display is output from the second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2 shown in FIG. 7, and thus, the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610 shown in FIG. The dot on the lower right side of the 7-segment lights up, and it is displayed that the setting contents have been confirmed.

Next, the main control CPU 600a transmits a setting switching end command (effect control command DI_CMD) reflecting the set value to the sub control board 80 (step S69).

<Main control: Explanation of main processing>
Thus, when the setting switching process (step S19) shown in FIG. 36 is completed through the above processes, the main control CPU 600a proceeds to the process of step S26 shown in FIG. 37.

On the other hand, the main control CPU 600a confirms whether the signal of the RAM clear switch 620 and the signal of the setting key switch 630 are all ON (step S18), and if they are not all ON (step S18). : NO), the main control CPU 600a performs the process of step S20 shown in FIG. 37.

That is, the main control CPU 600a corresponds to "00H" corresponding to the set value (for example, "1" to "6" of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player stored in the main control RAM 600c (see FIG. 6). (The set value of "05H") is acquired, and it is confirmed whether or not it is equal to or less than the set maximum value (for example, "05H" corresponding to "6") (step S20). If it is equal to or less than the set maximum value (step S20: YES), it is confirmed whether or not the backup flag is set to ON (step S21).

<Main control: Main processing: Explanation of RAM error processing>
If it is not less than or equal to the set maximum value (step S20: NO), or if the backup flag is not set to ON (step S21: NO), the main control CPU 600a indicates that the sub control board 80 has a RAM error. An error command (effect control command DI_CMD) is transmitted (step S22).

Next, the main control CPU 600a outputs an error display to the LED data port (step S23). As a result, from the second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2 shown in FIG. 7, a value indicating an error (for example, LED data for displaying "E" on the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610). ) Is output, and a value indicating an error (for example, “E”) is displayed on the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610 shown in FIG. 7.

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a power supply abnormality check process (step S24), returns to the process of step S23, and repeats the process. The power supply abnormality check process is the same as the power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 39.

<Main control: Explanation of main processing>
On the other hand, if the backup flag is set to ON (step S21: YES), the signal of the RAM clear switch 620 is confirmed (step S25).

<Main control: Main processing: Explanation of RAM clear processing>
When the signal of the RAM clear switch 620 is ON (step S25: YES) or the setting switching process (step S19) shown in FIG. 36 is performed, the main control CPU 600a is the measurement RAM area 600ce of the main control RAM 600c (FIG. 8). (A), the measurement stack area 600 cc (see FIG. 8 (a)) is not cleared, and the normal RAM area 600 ca (see FIG. 8 (a)) of the main control RAM 600 c and the normal stack area 600 cc (FIG. 8). (See (a)) is cleared (step S26).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the RAM clear notification timer to 30 seconds (30s) (step S27), and uses a hall computer (not shown) for managing the game islands of the game field via an external terminal (not shown). The timer for outputting the security signal output to is set to 30 seconds (30s) (step S28).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets initial values in a part of the main control RAM 600c (step S29), and proceeds to the process of step S41.

<Main control: Explanation of main processing>
On the other hand, if the signal of the RAM clear switch 620 is OFF (step S25: NO), the main control CPU 600a has the upper opening / closing door 7, the door opening signal indicating whether or not the lower opening door 8 is open, and the setting key. The signal of the switch 630 is acquired (step S30), and it is confirmed whether or not all the signals are turned on (step S31). If all are not turned on (step S31: NO), the process proceeds to step S40.

<Main control: Main processing: Explanation of setting confirmation processing>
On the other hand, if all are ON (step S31: YES), the main control CPU 600a transmits a set value command (effect control command DI_CMD) reflecting the set value to the sub control board 80 (step S32).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets a timer for outputting a security signal output to a hall computer (not shown) used for managing the game islands of the game field to 30 seconds (30s) via an external terminal (not shown). (Step S33).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the security signal output to the hall computer (not shown) used for managing the game islands of the game field to ON via an external terminal (not shown), and sets the security signal to ON via an external terminal (not shown). Then, a security signal is output to the hall computer (not shown) for 30 seconds (30 s) set by the timer (step S34).

Next, the main control CPU 600a outputs the set value to the LED data port (step S35). As a result, the set value is output from the second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2 shown in FIG. 7, and the set value is displayed on the first measurement / setting display device 610A of the measurement / setting display device 610 shown in FIG. Will be done.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets a predetermined value in the register in the main control CPU 600a so that a wait of 4 ms is applied, and performs a process of counting down (step S36).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a power supply abnormality check process (step S37). The power supply abnormality check process is the same as the power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 39.

Next, the main control CPU 600a creates switch edge data of the setting key switch 630 signal from the level data of the setting key switch 630 of the previous time and the present time (step S38). The main control CPU 600a stores the created edge data in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c.

Next, the main control CPU 600a confirms the edge data stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c (step S39), and if the setting key switch 630 is ON (step). S39: NO), the process returns to the process of step S34.

<Main control: Explanation of main processing>
On the other hand, if the setting key switch 630 is OFF (step S39: YES), initial values such as a backup flag and an error detection timer are set in a part of the main control RAM 600c (step S40).

Next, the main control CPU 600a transmits a command (effect control command DI_CMD) indicating whether the power is restored by clearing the RAM or the backup by clearing the RAM to the sub control board 80 (step S41).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information (step S42).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the internal function register (step S43). Specifically, the launch control signal is set to ON and transmitted to the payout control board 70. As a result, the payout control board 70 controls to start the operation of the launch control board 71. In addition, a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) having a function of creating a pulse output having a constant cycle, a function of measuring time, and the like provided inside the main control CPU 600a is set. That is, the main control CPU 600a sets the time constant register of the CTC so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every 4 ms.

Next, the main control CPU 600a reads out the program stored in the measurement program area 600be of the main control ROM 600b shown in FIG. 8B in a state where the interrupt to itself is set to the disabled state (step S44), and receives the prize. The process of the prize ball winning number management process 1 for calculating the performance such as the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the number of balls and the number of non-winning balls is performed (step S45). Then, the main control CPU 600a performs various random number counter update processes based on the program stored in the normal program area 600ba of the main control ROM 600b shown in FIG. 8B, and then interrupts (step S46). It returns to the permitted state (step S47), returns to step S44, and performs a loop process in which the processes of steps S44 to S47 are repeated.

However, according to the present embodiment, if the setting switching process (step S19) shown in FIG. 36 is not performed when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off for some reason during the setting change, steps S22 to step S As shown in the process of S24, the RAM is abnormal, and only when the setting switching process (step S19) shown in FIG. 36 is performed, the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in step S57 shown in FIG. 38, a security signal is output from the external terminal during the setting change without monitoring the time during the setting change, and is shown in FIG. 37 after the setting change. As shown in step S33 and step S34, a security signal is output from the external terminal for a predetermined time by time monitoring. Note that the reason why the time is not monitored while the setting is being changed is that the time required for the setting change operation is undefined by the operator, so if the time is monitored, the output of the security signal may stop even during the operation. This is because the processing load increases when the processing of extending the monitoring time is added during the operation.

Thus, in the past, when an abnormality occurs in the RAM value due to a power failure, there is a possibility that the setting value or the like may be affected by the game and the setting may be restarted from the changed state. However, if the processing as in the present embodiment is performed, the possibility that the game is restarted can be reduced while the possibility of affecting the game remains.

Further, in the process of the present embodiment, if the setting switching process (step S19) shown in FIG. 36 is not performed when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off for some reason during the setting change, steps S22 to step S In the power supply abnormality check process, the main control CPU 600a clears the output data of the output port, but does not set the backup flag to ON so that the RAM error occurs as shown in the process of S24. The main control CPU 600a clears the output data of the output port (for example, LED data port or LED common port) used when changing the setting when clearing the output data of the output port, and is also used when changing the setting. The output data of the output port that does not exist is also cleared.

In this embodiment, the setting value of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, the setting value of "00H" to "05H" corresponding to "1" to "6") is set in 6 steps. An example that can be changed is shown, but even if the setting value (for example, the setting value of "00H" corresponding to "1") has only one step, it has the setting change function as described above for the common use of members and programs. You may be doing it. At this time, in the setting switching process shown in FIG. 38, even if the setting value stored in the W register is incremented by 1 in step S66, the maximum setting value becomes "00H" corresponding to "1", and the figure is always shown. In step S56 shown in 38, the process that the value of the W register becomes "00H" is performed. As a result, the setting change process can be executed by the same program as the program when there are a plurality of setting values. By doing so, even if the main control CPU 600a overwrites the set value stored in the main control RAM 600c (see FIG. 6) in step S67 shown in FIG. 38, the value becomes constant and fluctuates. There is nothing to do. This makes it possible to standardize members and programs.

<Main control: Explanation of timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a timer interrupt program that interrupts the above-mentioned main processing and is started every 4 ms will be described. In addition, this program reads and executes the program stored in the normal program area 600ba of the main control ROM 600b shown in FIG. 8B.

When this timer interrupt occurs, a save process is executed to save the contents of the register group in the main control CPU 600a to the normal stack area 600cc (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c (step S100), and then the voltage. The abnormality check process is executed (step S101). This voltage abnormality check process is the same process as the power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 39.

Next, the main control CPU 600a includes a special symbol 1 start port switch 44a (see FIG. 6), a special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6), a normal symbol start port switch 47a (see FIG. 6), and a general upper right corner. Winning opening switch 48a1 (see Fig. 6), upper left general winning opening switch 48b1 (see Fig. 6), left middle general winning opening switch 48c1 (see Fig. 6), lower left general winning opening switch 48d1 (see Fig. 6), and out opening. ON / OFF signals of various switches including the switch 49a (see FIG. 6) and the large winning opening switch 46c (see FIG. 6) are input, and the ON / OFF signal level and its rise are input to the work area in the main control RAM 600c. The state is stored (step S102).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a timer subtraction process of various timers (ordinary symbol variation timer, ordinary symbol accessory timer, etc.) that manage the time of each game operation (step S103).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a random number management process (step S104). Specifically, it performs a process of updating random numbers such as ordinary symbols and special symbols used in the winning / failing lottery.

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs an error management process (step S105). In the error management process, the supply of the game ball is stopped, or the game ball is clogged, the special symbol 1 start port switch 44a (see FIG. 6), the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6), and the like. Normal symbol start port switch 47a (see FIG. 6), upper right general winning opening switch 48a1 (see FIG. 6), upper left general winning opening switch 48b1 (see FIG. 6), left middle general winning opening switch 48c1 (see FIG. 6), lower left It determines whether there is any abnormality inside the device such as disconnection of the general winning opening switch 48d1 (see FIG. 6), the out opening switch 49a (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening switch 46c (see FIG. 6). be. When an error occurs, a command (effect control command DI_CMD) corresponding to the error is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

Next, the main control CPU 600a executes the prize ball management process (step S106). This prize ball management process outputs a payout control command PAY_CMD for causing the payout control board 70 (see FIG. 6) to perform a payout operation.

Next, the main control CPU 600a executes normal symbol processing (step S107). In this ordinary symbol processing, the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed, and the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol and the stop display state of the ordinary symbol are determined based on the lottery result. The details of this process will be described later.

Next, the main control CPU 600a executes a normal electric accessory management process (step S108). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, a signal related to the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 45c (see FIG. 6) required for generating the ordinary electric accessory opening game is generated based on the lottery result of the ordinary symbol processing (step S107). It is a thing.

Next, the main control CPU 600a executes the special symbol processing (step S109). In this special symbol processing, the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is executed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol and the stop display mode of the special symbol are determined based on the result of the lottery. The details of this process will be described later.

Next, the main control CPU 600a executes the special electric accessory management process (step S110). In this special electric accessory management process, mainly, when the big hit lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit", the setting process necessary for executing and controlling the winning game corresponding to the hit is performed. be. At this time, a signal relating to the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 46b (see FIG. 6) is also generated. If the big hit lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit", a command related to it (effect control command DI_CMD) is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a right-handed notification information management process (step S111). In this right-handed notification information management process, right-handed situations are advantageous, such as when the opening / closing member 45b is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, or when the opening / closing door 46a is opened and the large winning opening (not shown) is opened. In, the process for displaying the "launch position guidance effect (right-handed notification effect)" that gives the right-handed instruction notification is performed. When the right-handed notification effect is performed, a command related to the right-handed notification effect (effect control command DI_CMD) is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in this right-handed notification information management process.

Next, the main control CPU 600a executes the LED management process (step S112). The details of this process will be described later.

Next, the main control CPU 600a executes the external terminal management process (step S113). In this external terminal management process, the hall computer (not shown) used for managing the game islands of the amusement park is provided with the number of hits, the number of occurrences of hits, the number of changes in special symbols, and the information on detecting winning balls in the winning opening. Predetermined game information such as security information is output from an external terminal (not shown).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a solenoid management process (step S114). At this time, the main control CPU 600a confirms the signal related to the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 45c (see FIG. 6) generated in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S108), and also confirms the special electric accessory management process (step S108). Check the signal related to the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 46b (see FIG. 6) generated in step S110). Then, based on this signal, the operation / stop of the normal electric accessory solenoid 45c or the special electric accessory solenoid 46b is controlled, and the opening / closing member 45b (see FIG. 5) is opened or closed, or a large winning opening (not shown). The opening / closing door 46a (see FIG. 5) operates so as to open or close.

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs out-of-use processing (step S115). The details of this process will be described later.

Next, the main control CPU 600a clears the watchdog timer (WDT) (not shown) (step S116), returns to the interrupt enable state (step S117), and returns the main control RAM 600c to the normal stack area 600cc (see FIG. 8A). The contents of the register saved in are restored to the end of the timer interrupt (step S118). As a result, the interrupt processing routine returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

<Main control: Explanation of normal symbol processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol processing will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the normal symbol processing, first, it is confirmed whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected at the normal symbol starting port 47 (see FIG. 5) composed of a gate, that is, the normal symbol starting port 47 of the normal symbol starting port 47. Check the signal level of the normal symbol start port switch 47a (see FIG. 6) (step S150). When the passage of the game ball is detected (step S150: YES), the main control CPU 600a stores the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol in order to determine whether or not the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is, for example, 4 or more. The normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 9A) of the main control RAM 600c is confirmed (step S151). At that time, if the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is less than 4 (step S151: ≠ MAX), the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is added by 1 (step S152). After that, the main control CPU 600a uses the normal symbol hit determination random value used for the normal symbol winning / failing lottery as the normal RAM area 600ca of the main control RAM 600c in which the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is stored (FIG. 8A). After storing in (see) (see step S153), the process proceeds to step S154.

On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball is not detected in step S150 (step S150: NO), when it is determined in step S151 that the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is 4 or more (step S151: = In MAX), the processing of steps S152 to S153 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S154.

When the main control CPU 600a proceeds to the process of step S154, it confirms whether the normal symbol per operation flag is set to ON, that is, whether 5AH is set to the normal symbol per operation flag (step S154). If 5AH is set in the normal symbol per operation flag (step S154: ON), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, and after updating the display data of the normal symbol (step S163), the normal symbol processing is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, if 5AH is not set in the normal symbol per operation flag (step S154: OFF), the processing state indicating the behavior of the normal symbol, that is, the value of the normal symbol operation status flag is confirmed (step S155). Then, if the normal symbol operation status flag is 00H, the main control CPU 600a determines that the state is before the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, proceeds to step S156, and determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for starting the normal symbol is 0. Confirm (step S156).

When the main control CPU 600a confirms the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c in which the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is stored, and then determines that the value is 0 (step S156). : = 0), after updating the display data of the normal symbol (step S163), the normal symbol processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not 0 (step S156: ≠ 0), the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is subtracted by 1 (step S157).

After that, the main control CPU 600a uses the normal symbol collision detection table NPP_TBL shown in FIG. 55 (a) to suspend the start of the normal symbol stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8 (a)) of the main control RAM 600c. Collision detection of random value corresponding to the number of balls is performed. That is, if the normal symbol probability variation flag indicating the game state is OFF, the main control CPU 600a has a lower limit value (in the figure, the normal symbol hit detection table NPP_TBL (normal state)) in which the random number value is shown in FIG. 55 (a). 249) or more determines whether or not it is below the upper limit value (250 in the figure), and if it is above the lower limit value and below the upper limit value, set 5AH to the normal symbol collision detection flag and turn it ON. In other cases, the normal symbol collision detection flag is turned off.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol probability change flag indicating the game state is ON, the random value is the upper limit at the lower limit value (4 in the figure) or more of the normal symbol collision detection table NPP_TBL (probability change state) shown in FIG. 55 (a). It is determined whether or not it is a value (250 in the figure) or less, and if it is equal to or more than the lower limit value and less than or equal to the upper limit value, 5AH is set in the normal symbol collision detection flag and turned ON. In other cases, the process of setting the normal symbol collision detection flag to OFF is performed (step S158).

Then, the main control CPU 600a determines the stop symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) based on the lottery result determined in the random number lottery process (step S159).

Next, the main control CPU 600a confirms whether the normal symbol time reduction flag that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation timer. If it is set to OFF, the process of setting the normal fluctuation time in the normal symbol fluctuation timer is performed (step S160).

Next, the main control CPU 600a is in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c in which the random number value used for the winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol corresponding to the number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol is stored. The storage area is shifted (step S161). That is, assuming that the maximum number of start-holding balls of the normal symbol can be held by 4, the random number value used for the winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol corresponding to the start-holding number of 4 of the normal symbol is set to 3 of the start-holding balls of the normal symbol. The normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c in which the random number value used for the winning / failing lottery of the corresponding normal symbol is stored is shifted to the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. The random value used for the winning / failing lottery of the symbol is the normal RAM area 600ca of the main control RAM 600c in which the random number value used for the winning / failing lottery of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the number of start-holding balls 2 of the ordinary symbol is stored (FIG. 8 (a). ) Shifts to), and the random number value used for the winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol corresponding to the starting hold ball number 2 of the normal symbol is the random number value used for the winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol corresponding to the starting holding ball number 1 of the normal symbol. Is performed to shift to the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c in which the is stored.

After this processing, the main control CPU 600a sets 01H to the normal symbol operation status flag used in step S155, and the random value used for the winning / failing lottery of the normal symbol corresponding to the start pending ball number 4 of the normal symbol is set. A process of setting 00H in the stored normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c is performed (step S162).

Then, after finishing the processing of the above step S162, the main control CPU 600a updates the display data of the normal symbol (step S163), and finishes the normal symbol processing.

On the other hand, in step S155, if the processing state indicating the behavior of the normal symbol, that is, the value of the normal symbol operation status flag is 01H, the main control CPU 600a determines that the normal symbol is changing. The determination is made, the process proceeds to step S164, and it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation timer is 0 (step S164). If the normal symbol fluctuation timer is not 0 (step S164: ≠ 0), the display data of the normal symbol is updated (step S163), and the normal symbol processing is completed. If the normal symbol fluctuation timer is 0 (step S164: = 0), the main control CPU 600a sets 02H to the normal symbol operation status flag used in step S155, and determines the result of the normal symbol winning / failing lottery. In order to maintain the time, for example, a time of about 600 ms is set in the normal symbol variation timer (step S165).

After finishing the process of step S165, the main control CPU 600a updates the display data of the normal symbol (step S163), and finishes the normal symbol process.

On the other hand, if the main control CPU 600a is in the processing state indicating the behavior of the normal symbol in step S155, that is, if the value of the normal symbol operation status flag is 02H, the main control CPU 600a has the normal symbol during the confirmation time (normal). It is determined that the symbol variation has ended and is stopped), the process proceeds to step S166, and it is confirmed whether or not the normal symbol variation timer is 0 (step S166). If the normal symbol fluctuation timer is not 0 (step S166: ≠ 0), the display data of the normal symbol is updated (step S163), and the normal symbol processing is completed. Then, if the normal symbol fluctuation timer is 0 (step S166: = 0), the main control CPU 600a sets 00H to the normal symbol operation status flag used in step S155 (step S167), and determines the normal symbol hit. It is confirmed whether the flag is set to ON (5AH is set) (step S168).

As a result, if the normal symbol collision detection flag is set to OFF (5AH is not set) (step S168: OFF), the main control CPU 600a updates the display data of the normal symbol (step S163). Normal design processing is completed. Then, if the normal symbol hit determination flag is set to ON (5AH is set) (step S168: ON), the main control CPU 600a turns on the normal symbol hit operation flag used in step S154 (5AH is set). After setting to (step S169), the normal symbol processing is finished.

<Main control: Explanation of special symbol processing>
Next, the above special symbol processing will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 42 to 49.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the special symbol processing, first, the winning ball (winning ball) of the game ball is inserted in the special symbol 1 starting port switch 44a (see FIG. 6) of the special symbol 1 starting port 44 (see FIG. 5). It is confirmed whether or not it has been detected (step S200), and further, the game ball is entered (winning ball) at the special symbol 2 starting port switch 45a (see FIG. 6) of the special symbol 2 starting port 45 (see FIG. 5). It is confirmed whether or not it has been detected (step S201).

<Main control: Special symbol processing: Explanation of starting port check processing>
Explaining this process in detail with reference to FIG. 43, the main control CPU 600a confirms whether or not a game ball has entered (winned) in the special symbol 1 starting port 44 or the special symbol 2 starting port 45, that is, special. The level of the special symbol 1 starting port switch 44a of the symbol 1 starting port 44 or the special symbol 2 starting port switch 45a of the special symbol 2 starting port 45 is confirmed (step S250). As a result, if the entry (winning) of the game ball is not detected (step S250: NO), the special symbol processing is completed.

On the other hand, if the winning (winning) of the game ball is detected (step S250: YES), the main control CPU 600a has a predetermined number of start-holding balls that trigger the change of the special symbol, and the normal RAM area 600ca of the main control RAM 600c. It is confirmed whether or not it is stored in (see FIG. 8A) (step S251). If the number of reserved balls for starting is less than 4 (step S251: ≠ MAX), the number of reserved balls for starting is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S252).

Next, the main control CPU 600a is a normal main control RAM 600c in which the random number value used when the special symbol is stopped, the random value for the fluctuation pattern, and the random value for the jackpot determination are stored as the number of start-holding balls that triggers the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is stored in the RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) (step 253).

Next, the main control CPU 600a confirms the current gaming state (whether or not the special symbol jackpot determination flag is set to ON, etc.), and determines whether or not it is in the look-ahead prohibition state (step S254). If the read-ahead prohibition state is not set (step S254: NO), the main control CPU 600a will draw a lottery for winning or failing the special symbol stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c in step S253. The jackpot determination random number value used in the above is acquired (step S255), and further, a start opening winning random number determination table (not shown) is acquired (step S256).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a jackpot lottery using the jackpot determination random number value acquired in step S255 and the start opening winning random number determination table (not shown) acquired in step S256, and further, the above In step S253, the type of jackpot (per rank-up bonus, normal jackpot, etc.) is determined using the random number value for the special symbol stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c. , The fluctuation pattern is determined using the random number value for the fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol start opening winning command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated (step S257). When generating this special symbol start opening winning command, a program for acquiring the fluctuation time as shown in FIG. 13B is executed.

Next, the main control CPU 600a generates a start hold addition command for lower bytes corresponding to the generated special symbol start opening winning command (step S258).

On the other hand, the main control CPU 600a finishes the process of the step S258, or in the step S251, whether the number of start-holding balls of the special symbol 1 or 2 is 4 or more (step S251: = MAX), or pre-reading. If it is in the prohibited state (step S254: YES), the start hold addition command of the upper byte corresponding to the increased number of start hold balls is generated (step S259).

Next, the main control CPU 600a combines the start hold addition command of the lower byte generated in step S258 and the start hold addition command of the upper byte generated in step S259, and then the start hold addition command (effect). As the control command DI_CMD), a process of transmitting to the sub-control board 80 is performed (step S260).

<Main control: Explanation of special symbol processing>
Thus, when the processes of steps S200 and S201 shown in FIG. 42 are completed, the main control CPU 600a is set to ON for the special symbol small hit operation flag, that is, 5 AH is set for the special symbol small hit operation flag. It is confirmed whether or not (step S202). If 5AH is set in the special symbol small hit operation flag (step S202: ON), it is determined that the special symbol is in the small hit, and after updating the display data of the special symbol (step S208), the special symbol is special. Finish the design processing.

On the other hand, if 5AH is not set in the special symbol small hit operation flag (step S202: OFF), is the special symbol big hit operation flag set to ON, that is, is 5AH set in the special symbol big hit operation flag? Is confirmed (step S203). If 5AH is set in the special symbol jackpot operation flag (step S203: ON), it is determined that the special symbol is in the jackpot, and after updating the display data of the special symbol (step S208), the special symbol processing is performed. To finish.

On the other hand, if 5AH is not set in the special symbol jackpot operation flag (step S203: OFF), the processing state indicating the behavior of the special symbol, that is, the value of the special symbol operation status flag is confirmed (step S204). More specifically, if the value of the special symbol operation status flag is 00H or 01H, the main control CPU 600a is waiting for the special symbol change (in the standby state for the next change because the special symbol is not changed). (Indicates that there is), and the special symbol change start processing is performed (step S205).

<Main control: Special symbol processing: Explanation of special symbol change start processing>
Explaining this process in detail with reference to FIG. 44, the main control CPU 600a confirms whether or not the number of start-holding balls that triggers the fluctuation of the special symbol is 0 (step S300). That is, when the main control CPU 600a confirms whether or not it is stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 9A) of the main control RAM 600c and determines that the number of reserved balls for starting is 0 (step S300). : = 0), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special symbol operation status flag is 00H (step S301). If the value of the special symbol operation status flag is 00H (step S301: YES), the special symbol change start process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol operation status flag is not 00H (step S301: NO), the main control CPU 600a transmits the customer waiting demo command as the effect control command DI_CMD to the sub control board 80 (see FIG. 6) (step). S302). In response to this, the sub-control board 80 (sub-control CPU 800a) shifts to the customer waiting demo state when a predetermined time elapses from the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11A.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the special symbol operation status flag to 00H (step S303), and ends the special symbol change start processing.

On the other hand, when the main control CPU 600a determines that the number of start holding balls is not 0 (step S300: ≠ 0), the number of start hold balls is subtracted by 1 (-1) (step S304), and the start hold subtraction command is produced and controlled. The command DI_CMD is transmitted to the sub control board 80 (sub control CPU 800a) (step S305). In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to the image (video) to the VDP 803. As a result, the VDP 803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41, thereby causing the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the image (video) data. Is a screen as shown in FIG. 13 (a-3), and a state in which three or two balls are held as start hold balls is displayed (see image P5). On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 (sub-control CPU 800a) cannot receive the start hold subtraction command, the liquid crystal display is in a state where three start hold balls are held as shown in FIG. 13 (a-4). It will be displayed on the display device 41 (see image P1). As a result, the number of start-holding balls actually stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c and the displayed number of start-holding balls do not match.

Next, the main control CPU 600a stores the normal RAM area 600ca of the main control RAM 600c in which the random value used when the special symbol is stopped, the random value for the fluctuation pattern, and the random value for jackpot determination (see step S253 in FIG. 31) are stored. The storage area in (see FIG. 8A) is shifted (step S306), and the normal RAM area 600ca of the main control RAM 600c in which the random number value used for the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start hold 4 is stored is stored. 0 is set in the area (see FIG. 8A) (step S307).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a hit determination process (step S308).

<Main control: Special symbol processing: Explanation of collision detection processing>
This process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 33. The main control CPU 600a is a normal RAM area 600ca (FIG. 8 (a)) of the main control RAM 600c in which a random value for jackpot determination (see step S253 in FIG. 31) is stored. ), The random value for jackpot determination is acquired (step S350).

Next, the main control CPU 600a acquires the address address of the hit determination table according to the fluctuating special figure. Here, the address address of the hit determination table D_RNDJDG shown in FIG. 46 corresponding to the fluctuating special figure 1 is acquired. The hit determination table data corresponding to the special symbol big hit determination table SDH_TBL shown in FIG. 55 (b) and the special symbol small hit determination table SDP_TBL shown in FIG. 55 (c) are shown in FIG. The hit determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 46. In the hit determination table, information on whether the determination values are different for each set value (in the present embodiment, the set values 1 to 6 are exemplified) and information on whether the determination values are different. , The determination value, and the value of the special symbol big hit determination flag and the special symbol small hit determination flag are stored.

Specifically, as can be easily understood by referring to the special symbol jackpot determination table SDH_TBL shown in FIG. 55 (b), the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state) and a probability change state (win lottery probability is higher than usual). (Probability fluctuation state, which is a high probability state) Since there is no difference between the lower limit values for each set value and it is "10001",
DB 000H
DW 10000
DB 000H, 000H, 000H
Is programmed.

On the other hand, as can be easily understood by referring to the special symbol jackpot determination table SDH_TBL shown in FIG. 55 (b), the upper limit of the normal state (low probability state) of the game state is different for each set value. ,
DB 001H
DW 10164
DW 10180
DW 10185
DW 10190
DW 10195
DW 10200
DB 05AH, 05AH, 000H
Is programmed.

On the other hand, as can be easily understood by referring to the special symbol jackpot determination table SDH_TBL shown in FIG. For,
DB 001H
DW 11640
DW 11800
DW 11850
DW 11900
DW 11950
DW 12000
DB 000H, 05AH, 000H
Is programmed.

On the other hand, as can be easily understood by referring to the special symbol small hit determination table SDP_TBL shown in FIG. 55 (c), the lower limit value of either the normal state (low probability state) or the probability change state (high probability state) of the game state There is no difference for each set value, and it is "20001", so
DB 000H
DW 20000
DB 000H, 000H, 000H
Is programmed.

Further, as can be easily understood by referring to the special symbol small hit determination table SDP_TBL shown in FIG. 55 (c), the upper limit value of either the normal state (low probability state) or the probability change state (high probability state) of the game state. There is no difference for each set value, and it is "20164", so
DB 000H
DW 20144
DB 000H, 000H, 05AH
Is programmed.

On the other hand, in this hit determination table, as shown in FIG. 46, the upper limit value (65535) of the big hit determination random number value is programmed as follows.
DB 000H
DW 65535
DB 000H, 000H, 000H

Thus, the main control CPU 600a acquires the address address of the hit determination table as described above (step S351).

Next, the main control CPU 600a changes the acquired address address to the address address in which the determination value shown in FIG. 46 is stored (step S352).

Next, the main control CPU 600a acquires information on whether the determination value is different for each set value shown in FIG. 46 (step S353), and confirms the value of the acquired information (step S354). If the acquired value is "0" (step S354: = 0), the process proceeds to step S357, and if the acquired value is not "0" (step S354: ≠ 0), the main control CPU 600a is the main control. A set value of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player stored in the RAM 600c (see FIG. 6) (for example, a set value of "00H" to "05H" corresponding to "1" to "6"). (Step S355).

Next, the main control CPU 600a changes to the address address in which the determination value corresponding to the acquired set value is stored (step S356). For example, when acquiring the judgment value of the upper limit value of the normal state (low probability state) of the game state, if the acquired setting value is "1", the address where the judgment value "10164" of the setting value 1 is stored. If the address is changed to an address and the set value is "6", the address address that refers to the data in the determination table is changed to the address address in which the determination value "10200" of the set value 6 is stored.

Next, the main control CPU 600a acquires the determination value shown in FIG. 46 from the current address address. For example, if it is related to a big hit and the information on whether the judgment value is different for each set value is "000H", the judgment value of "10000" is acquired and the information on whether the judgment value is different for each set value is " If it is "001H" and the set value is "1", the determination value of "10164" is acquired (step S357).

Next, the main control CPU 600a changes the address address to the start address address in which the next determination value is stored (step S358), and compares the acquired jackpot determination random number value with the acquired determination value (step S359).

Next, if the acquired jackpot determination random value is not smaller than the acquired determination value (step S360: NO), the main control CPU 600a returns to the process of step S353, and the acquired jackpot determination random value is from the acquired determination value. The process of step S353 to step S360 is repeated until the value becomes smaller (step S360: YES).

Next, if the acquired jackpot determination random value becomes smaller than the acquired determination value (step S360: YES), the main control CPU 600a has the special symbol jackpot determination flag and the special symbol small hit according to the gaming state shown in FIG. The determination flag is acquired (step S361), and the hit determination process is completed.

By the way, even when the set value (for example, the set value of "1") has only one step, the program shown in steps S350 to S361 can be used as it is (program standardization). The data in the hit determination table shown in FIG. 47 is changed to the data shown in FIG. 47.

That is, to explain only the differences from FIG. 46, since the set value has only one step, the upper limit of the game state in the normal state (low probability state) does not differ for each set value, but for the purpose of standardizing the program. , Program as "DB 001H". Further, since the set value has only one step, the upper limit of the game state in the probable change state (high probability state) is programmed as "DB 001H" for the purpose of standardizing the program, although there is no difference for each set value. Further, in order to make the data size the same as the data size of the hit determination table shown in FIG. 46, dummy data "DW 0000H" is added.

By doing so, even if the set value has only one step, the determination value is acquired by referring to the set value. Therefore, the processes of steps S354 to 356 are always executed, and an unused program is generated. Programs can be standardized without making them. This is because any unused programs will result in nonconformity in the certification test and all programs must be used.

<Main control: Special symbol processing: Explanation of special symbol change start processing>
Thus, after completing the hit determination process (step S308) as described above, the main control CPU 600a is stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c in step S253 of FIG. A stop symbol of the special symbol is generated using the random value used when the special symbol is stopped (step S309).

Next, the main control CPU 600a prepares to shift to any of the normal state, the time saving state, the latent probability change state, and the probability change state (step S310).

Next, the main control CPU 600a generates a variation pattern of the special symbol using the variation pattern random value stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 9A) of the main control RAM 600c in step S253 of FIG. Then, the variation pattern command of the variation pattern of the generated special symbol is transmitted to the sub control board 80 (sub control CPU 800a) as the effect control command DI_CMD (step S311). In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a determines the fluctuation pattern at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, and temporarily stores the control signal for instructing execution in the sub-control RAM 800c. As a result, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list related to an image (video) among the control signals for instructing the execution of the effect pattern stored in the sub-control RAM 800c to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 19A to 19E, an image in which the decorative symbol and the resident symbol are changed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the special symbol changing flag to 5AH and puts it in the ON state (step S312).

Next, the main control CPU 600a generates a symbol designation command for designating a special symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 (step S313), and the generated symbol designation command is used as an effect control command DI_CMD for the sub control board 80 (sub). A process of transmitting to the control CPU 800a) is performed (step S314).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets 02H in the special symbol operation status flag (step S315), and ends the special symbol change start processing.

<Main control: Explanation of special symbol processing>
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, when the value of the special symbol operation status flag is 02H, the main control CPU 600a determines that the special symbol is changing (indicating that the special symbol is currently changing), and is special. Processing during symbol change is performed (step S206).

<Main control: Special symbol processing: Explanation of processing during special symbol change>
Explaining this process in detail with reference to FIG. 48, first, the main control CPU 600a has elapsed the fluctuation time set in the special symbol fluctuation timer in step S311 of FIG. 44, that is, whether or not it has become 0. Is confirmed (step S400). If the special symbol change timer is not 0 (step S400: NO), the main control CPU 600a ends the process during special symbol change.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation timer is 0 (step S400: YES), the main control CPU 600a transmits the symbol confirmation command as the effect control command DI_CMD to the sub control board 80 (sub control CPU 800a) (step S401). In response to this, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for confirming the symbol to the VDP 803 at the timing T6A shown in FIG. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (p), the stopped decorative symbol (see image P28A) and the stopped resident symbol (see image P29A) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, the resident symbol is switched to the stopped symbol regardless of the update order of the changing symbols.

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets 03H in the special symbol operation status flag and 00H in the special symbol changing flag. Further, the main control CPU 600a sets, for example, a time of about 500 ms in the special symbol variation timer in order to maintain the winning / failing lottery result of the special symbol for a certain period of time (step S402). After that, the main control CPU 600a ends the processing during the special symbol change.

<Main control: Explanation of special symbol processing>
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, when the value of the special symbol operation status flag is 03H, the main control CPU 600a indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed (indicating that the change of the special symbol has ended and is stopped). Judgment is made, and processing is performed during the special symbol confirmation time (step S207).

<Main control: Special symbol processing: Explanation of processing during special symbol confirmation>
Explaining this process in detail with reference to FIG. 49, first, the main control CPU 600a has elapsed the fluctuation time set in the special symbol fluctuation timer in step S311 of FIG. 44, that is, whether or not it has become 0. Is confirmed (step S450). If the special symbol variation timer is not 0 (step S450 ≠ 0), the main control CPU 600a ends the process during the special symbol confirmation time.

On the other hand, if the special symbol fluctuation timer is 0 (step S450 = 0), the main control CPU 600a sets the special symbol operation status flag to 01H (step S451), and is the special symbol jackpot determination flag set to ON? Confirm (whether 5AH is set) (step S452). If the special symbol jackpot determination flag is set to ON (if 5AH is set) (step S452: YES), 00H is set in the special symbol jackpot determination flag, and 5AH is set in the special symbol jackpot operation flag. , The normal symbol time reduction flag is set to 00H, the normal symbol probability change flag is set to 00H, the special symbol time reduction flag is set to 00H, the special symbol probability change flag is set to 00H, and the number of special symbol time reductions described later is set. A process of setting 00H to the counter and the special symbol probability variation counter is performed (step S453). After that, the main control CPU 600a ends the processing during the special symbol confirmation time.

On the other hand, if the special symbol big hit determination flag is not set to ON (if 5AH is not set) (step S452: NO), is the main control CPU 600a set to the special symbol small hit determination flag to ON (step S452: NO)? Check if 5AH is set) (step S454). If the special symbol small hit determination flag is set to ON (if 5AH is set) (step S454: YES), 00H is set in the special symbol small hit determination flag, and 5AH is set in the special symbol small hit operation flag. Is set (step S455).

After finishing the process of step S455, or if the special symbol small hit determination flag is not set to ON (if 5AH is not set) (step S454: NO), the main control CPU 600a shortens the special symbol time. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the count counter is 0 (step S456).

If the value of the special symbol time reduction counter is not 0 (step S456: NO), the value of the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (-1) (step S457), and the main control CPU 600a again performs the special symbol time reduction counter. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the counter is 0 (step S458). If the value of the special symbol time reduction counter is 0 (step S458: YES), 00H is set for the normal symbol time reduction flag, 00H is set for the normal symbol probability change flag, and 00H is set for the normal symbol time reduction flag. Is set (step S459).

After the processing of step S459 is completed, or if the value of the special symbol time reduction counter is 0 (step S456: YES) or the value of the special symbol time reduction counter is not 0 (step S458: NO), the main The control CPU 600a confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol probability variation counter is 0 (step S460). If the value of the special symbol probability variation counter is 0 (step S460: YES), the main control CPU 600a ends the process during the special symbol confirmation time.

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol probability variation counter is not 0 (step S460: NO), the main control CPU 600a subtracts 1 from the value of the special symbol probability variation counter (-1) (step S461), and again the special symbol. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step S462). If the value of the special symbol probability variation counter is not 0 (step S462: NO), the main control CPU 600a ends the process during the special symbol confirmation time.

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol probability variation counter is 0 (step S462: YES), the main control CPU 600a sets the normal symbol time reduction flag to 00H, sets the normal symbol probability variation flag to 00H, and sets the special symbol time reduction flag. Is set to 00H, a process of setting 00H to the special symbol probability change flag is performed (step S463), and the process is terminated during the special symbol confirmation time.

<Main control: Explanation of special symbol processing>
Thus, when any of the processes of step S205, step S206, and step S207 shown in FIG. 42 is completed, the main control CPU 600a ends the special symbol processing after updating the display data of the special symbol (step S208). ..

<Main control: Explanation of LED management process>
Next, the LED management process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50.

The main control CPU 600a clears the LED common port and the LED data port (step S500), and updates the LED output counter (step S501).

Next, the main control CPU 600a selects output data from the LED output counter and the selected LED common output selection table (step S502). This LED common output selection table is programmed as shown in FIG.

Specifically, the destination where the LED data is output is the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5), and the common data for outputting the LED data to the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5). And are programmed as follows.
DB 0001 0001B
DW D_MKLED0, D_MKLED0

Next, the destination where the LED data is output is the special symbol 2 display device 50b (see FIG. 5), and the common data for outputting the LED data to the special symbol 2 display device 50b (see FIG. 5). It is programmed as follows.
DB 0010 0010B
DW D_MKLED1, D_MKLED1

Next, the destination where the LED data is output is the 7-segment display device 52a (see FIG. 5), and the common data for outputting the LED data to the 7-segment display device 52a (see FIG. 5) are as follows. It is programmed as.
DB 0100 0100B
DW D_MKLED2A, D_MKLED2B

Next, the destination to which the LED data is output is the normal symbol display device 51 (see FIG. 5), the right-handed notification lamp 52c (see FIG. 5), the round lamp 52b (see FIG. 5), and the normal symbol display device. The common data for outputting the LED data to the 51 (see FIG. 5), the right-handed notification lamp 52c (see FIG. 5), and the round lamp 52b (see FIG. 5) are programmed as follows.
DB 1000 1000B
DW D_MKLED3, D_MKLED3

By the way, of the 8-bit signals, the 4 bits in the front stage are output from the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2 (see FIG. 7) (referred to as commons 00 to 04 in FIG. 51), and the common data to be output is in the rear stage. 4 bits are output from the second LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a3 (see FIG. 7) (in FIG. 51, it is described as commons 10 to 13). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the common data is output from the same port. This is because when trying to output different common data from the same port, the LED does not light normally unless one of the common data is reflected and output.

That is, in order to output "1" from the first LED dynamic lighting common data first signal 611a2a (see FIG. 7) of the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2, "0000 0001" is output from the port and then the second LED dynamic. When "0001 0000" is output from the port in order to output "1" from the second LED dynamic lighting common data first signal 611a3a (see FIG. 7) of the lighting common data signal 611a3, the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2 The data of the first LED dynamic lighting common data 611a2a (see FIG. 7) of the first signal will be cleared. As a result, the LED does not light normally, so that data must be newly output to the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2a (see FIG. 7) of the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the common data is output together in advance, and the LED data is later output to the measurement / setting display device 610 by the LED update process outside the used area (see FIG. 53) described later. I try to do it. Even in this way, the LED will be turned on without any problem in appearance.

Thus, the main control CPU 600a selects output data from the LED output counter and the selected LED common output selection table (step S502), and then outputs the data to the LED common port (step S503). For example, if it is selected in step S502 that the destination to which the LED data is output is the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5), "0001 0001" is output in step S503. Become. As a result, the first LED dynamic lighting common data first signal 611a2a (see FIG. 7) of the first LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a2 and the second LED dynamic lighting common data second signal 611a3a of the second LED dynamic lighting common data signal 611a3 (see FIG. 7). (See FIG. 7) will output "1".

Next, the main control CPU 600a creates the output destination LED data of the selected LED common (step S504). For example, if it is selected in step S502 that the destination to which the LED data is output is the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5), the LED to be displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5) is displayed. Data will be created.

Next, the main control CPU 600a outputs the created LED data to the selected LED data port (step S505). As a result, the data created from the first LED dynamic lighting data signal 611b2 (see FIG. 7) is output. For example, in the case of LED data to be displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5), the data is output to the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5), and thus the special symbol 1 display device 50a (see FIG. 5). The output data will be displayed in (see 5).

<Main control: Explanation of processing outside the used area>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the above-mentioned out-of-use area processing will be described in detail. In this process, the number of prize balls stored in the measurement program area 600be (see FIG. 8B) of the main control ROM 600b, the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the non-winning number, and the like are obtained. It is done using the program used for the measurement.

The main control CPU 600a saves all the registers to the measurement stack area 600cg (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c (step S550), and sets the stack pointer during normal processing to the measurement stack area of the main control RAM 600c. Evacuate to 600 cg (see FIG. 8A) (step S551).

Next, the main control CPU 600a sets the stack pointer address for outside the used area in the stack pointer inside the main control CPU 600a (step S552).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs the prize ball winning number management process 2 (step S553). In this prize ball winning number management process 2, a process of displaying the performance display value calculated in the prize ball winning number management process 1 of step S45 shown in FIG. 37 on the measurement / setting display device 610 (see FIG. 7) is performed. ..

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs the LED update process outside the used area (step S554).

<Main control: Explanation of LED update processing outside the used area>
Explaining this process in detail with reference to FIG. 53, the main control CPU 600a first acquires the LED output counter value (step S600).

Next, the main control CPU 600a selects LED data corresponding to the LED common from the acquired LED output counter value (step S601).

Next, the main control CPU 600a outputs LED data to the selected LED port (step S602). As a result, LED data is output from the second LED dynamic lighting data signal 611c2, and the measurement / setting display device 610 displays the content (performance display) regarding the ratio of how many prize balls were awarded at the time of low accuracy. It becomes.

That is, since the data has already been output from the LED common port in step S503 of the LED management process of FIG. 50, it is sufficient to output the data to the LED data port.

When displaying data on each of the 7 segments of the measurement / setting display device 610, LED data is acquired from the table shown below in which the work addresses are arranged in order.

D_LEDDATA:
DW W_7SEG0 ← 1st digit data of 7-segment (1st measurement / setting display device 610A)
DW W_7SEG1 ← 2nd digit data of 7-segment (2nd measurement / setting display device 610B)
DW W_7SEG2 ← 3rd digit data of 7-segment (3rd measurement / setting display device 610C)
DW W_7SEG3 ← 4th digit data of 7-segment (4th measurement / setting display device 610D)

Here, since the LED output counter value directly corresponds to the common number, the LED data corresponding to the LED output counter value is acquired from the above table, and the acquired LED data is output from the LED data port. It will be. As a result, the content (performance display) relating to the ratio of how many prize balls were awarded at the time of low accuracy is displayed on the measurement / setting display device 610.

<Main control: Explanation of processing outside the used area>
Thus, when the main control CPU 600a finishes the out-of-use area LED update process (step S554) through the above processes, the special symbol 1 start port switch 44a (see FIG. 6) and the special symbol 2 start port switch 45a (see FIG. 6). (See FIG. 6), normal symbol start port switch 47a (see FIG. 6), upper right general winning opening switch 48a1 (see FIG. 6), upper left general winning opening switch 48b1 (see FIG. 6), left middle general winning opening switch 48c1 (see FIG. 6). 6), lower left general winning opening switch 48d1 (see FIG. 6), out opening switch 49a (see FIG. 6), large winning opening switch 46c (see FIG. 6), etc. It is stored in the measurement RAM area 600ce (see FIG. 8A) (step S555).

Next, the main control CPU 600a performs a process of updating the test firing test signal used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the gaming machine (step S556), and the main control RAM 600c The stack pointer at the time of normal processing saved in the measurement stack area 600 cg (see FIG. 8A) is returned (step S557), and all the registers are returned (step S558).

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the measurement / setting display device 610 displays the content (performance display) relating to the ratio of how many prize balls were awarded at the time of low probability, and displays the special gaming state advantageous to the player. It is also possible to display the setting contents of the probability of occurrence. Further, the measurement / setting display device 610 has four 7 segments (first measurement / setting display device 610A, second measurement / setting display device 610B, third measurement / setting display device 610C, fourth measurement). -Composed of a setting display device 610D), when the content (performance display) related to the ratio of how many prize balls were won at low probability is displayed, four 7 segments are used, which is a special advantage for the player. When the setting content of the probability of generating the game state is displayed, one 7-segment is used. As shown in the setting switching process shown in FIG. 38 and the LED update process outside the used area shown in FIG. 52, both of them are lit by the dynamic lighting method, but some prize balls are given at the time of low accuracy. When the content (performance display) related to the ratio etc. is displayed, the common data is switched and four 7 segments (first measurement / setting display device 610A, second measurement / setting display device 610B, third). While the measurement / setting display device 610C and the fourth measurement / setting display device 610D) are lit, in the setting switching process shown in FIG. 38, one 7-segment (first measurement / setting display device 610A) is lit. ) Is used, so the 7-segment (first measurement / setting display device 610A) is turned on without switching the common data.

Furthermore, when the setting of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is changed, it is used during the game processing such as the lottery processing stored in the normal program area 600ba of the main control ROM 600b shown in FIG. 8 (b). The program is used and data is output to the measurement / setting display device 610 (see the setting switching process shown in FIG. 38). On the other hand, when the content (performance display) relating to the ratio of how many prize balls were awarded at the time of low accuracy is displayed, the prize balls stored in the measurement program area 600be of the main control ROM 600b shown in FIG. 8 (b). The program used to measure the total number of game balls fired in the game area 40 including the number and the number of non-winning prizes is used, and the data is output to the measurement / setting display device 610 (Fig.). See the out-of-use LED update process shown in 52).

Thus, in the past, in a situation where the program capacity was limited, the processing was complicated and there was a risk of squeezing the program capacity. However, if the processing as in the present embodiment is performed, the limited program capacity can be efficiently used. Can be used as a program. When outputting the data, although the common data used for the special symbol 1 display device 50a and the like and the common data used for the measurement / setting display device 610 are different, they are output from one port. At this time, when the setting of the probability of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is changed, only the common data displayed on the measurement / setting display device 610 is output (see steps S58 to S60 shown in FIG. 38). At the time, the common data used for the special symbol 1 display device 50a and the like and the common data used for the measurement / setting display device 610 are output at the same timing (see FIG. 51). As a result, the limited program capacity can be used more efficiently.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the common data is output from one port, but it may be output from different ports. Even in this case, if the LED output counter described above is used in common, the program capacity can be reduced.

At this time, an LED driver different from the LED driver 611a shown in FIG. 7 is required separately. Further, when displaying the data on each of the 7 segments of the measurement / setting display device 610, the data is displayed using a program as shown in FIG. 54. That is, in the program shown in FIG. 54, common data for displaying data in each of the 7 segments of the measurement / setting display device 610 and LED data to be output are stored.

Specifically, the destination where the LED data is output is the first digit data (first measurement / setting display device 610A) of the seven segments, and the first digit data (first measurement / setting). The common data for outputting the LED data to the display device 610A) is programmed as follows.
DB 0000 0001B
DW W_7SEG0

Next, the destination where the LED data is output is the second digit data of the 7 segment (second measurement / setting display device 610B), and the second digit data (second measurement / setting display device 610B). The common data for outputting the LED data to) is programmed as follows.
DB 0000 0010B
DW W_7SEG1

Next, the destination where the LED data is output is the third digit data (third measurement / setting display device 610C) of the seven segments, and the third digit data (third measurement / setting display device 610C). The common data for outputting the LED data to) is programmed as follows.
DB 0000 0100B
DW W_7SEG2

Next, the destination where the LED data is output is the data of the 4th digit of the 7 segment (4th measurement / setting display device 610D), and the data of the 4th digit (4th measurement / setting display device 610D). The common data for outputting the LED data to) is programmed as follows.
DB 0000 1000B
DW W_7SEG3

Thus, by using such a program, it is possible to display the data on each of the 7 segments of the measurement / setting display device 610 even if the common data is output from different ports.

<Processing content of sub-control board>
Next, regarding the processing method of the effect shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, 16 and 19 to 35, the processing contents (outline of the program) of the sub-control board 80 shown in FIGS. 56 to 60 are specified. To explain.

First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power-on signal indicating that the power is turned on is sent from the power supply board 130 (see FIG. 6) to each control board. Then, in response to the signal, the sub-control CPU 800a performs the main process shown in FIG. 56.

<Sub control: Main processing>
As shown in FIG. 56, first, the sub-control CPU 800a initializes the registers provided inside and sets the input / output directions of the input / output ports. Further, the data transmitted from the output port set in the output direction is set to be serial transfer (step S1000). As shown in FIG. 16, when the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 is transferred to the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802 using the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6). The sub-control CPU 800a instructs the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6) to transfer the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 to the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802. As a result, the DMA controller 800a1 transfers the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 to the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802. At this time, the sub-control CPU 800a continues the following processing regardless of the operation of the DMA controller 800a1.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a initializes a memory area in the sub-control RAM 800c that stores the effect control command DI_CMD received from the main control board 60 (see FIG. 6) (step S1001). Then, the sub-control CPU 800a performs an interrupt permission setting process for the input port that receives the interrupt signal from the main control board 60 (step S1002).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a initializes the memory area in the sub-control RAM 800c used as the work area and the stack area (step S1003), and issues an initialization command to the sound LSI 801 (see FIG. 6). As a result, the sound LSI 801 initializes the register provided inside the sound LSI 801 (step S1004).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the motors (not shown) that operate the upper, left, right, and upper left movable accessories 43a to 43d (see FIG. 5), and the motors (not shown). ) Is stored, and the memory area in the sub-control RAM 800c is confirmed. When the abnormality data is stored, the sub-control CPU 800a issues a command to return the motor to the origin position. As a result, the upper / left / right / upper left movable accessories 43a to 43d return to the initial positions (step S1005).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a sets a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) provided inside the sub-control CPU 800a, which has a function of creating a pulse output having a fixed period, a function of measuring time, and the like. That is, the sub-control CPU 800a sets the time constant register of the CTC so that a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted every 1 ms (step S1006).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a performs a checksum operation, which is an 8-bit addition operation targeting the work area of the sub-control RAM 800c (step S1007), and uses the checksum operation value and a memory backup (see step S1015) described later. It is calculated and compared with the checksum calculation value stored in the sub-control RAM 800c, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S1008). If they do not match (step S1008: NO), a process of clearing all the areas in the sub-control RAM 800c is performed (step S1009).

On the other hand, after matching (step S1008: YES) or finishing the process of step S1009, the sub-control CPU 800a cancels the watch dock timer function (step S1010) (not shown), and hardware such as the sub-control CPU 800a and VDP803. Is refreshed (step S1011).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a reads the effect control command DI_CMD received from the main control board 60 (see FIG. 6) stored in the memory area in the sub-control RAM 800c, and subordinates the effect pattern according to the content thereof. It is determined by lottery from a large number of effect patterns stored in advance in the control ROM 800b (step S1012). At this time, if the customer waiting demo command is not provided and the game state shifts to the customer waiting demo state triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the timer is activated and counts for a predetermined time when the symbol confirmation command is received. It will be.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a performs a process of analyzing the input contents of the setting button 15 or the effect button device 13 acquired by the timer interrupt process described later (step S1013). Specifically, the player analyzes whether the setting button 15 or the effect button device 13 is pressed, released, or remains pressed by the player.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a controls the operation of the upper / left / right / upper left movable accessories 43a to 43d (see FIG. 5) and the decorative lamp board 90 (see FIG. 5) based on the effect pattern determined by lottery in step S1012. (See FIG. 6), the lighting or extinguishing of decorative lamps such as LED lamps, the control of the speaker 17, and the control of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 are executed (step S1014). The specific processing method will be described later.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a performs a checksum operation, which is an 8-bit addition operation targeting the work area of the sub-control RAM 800c, and performs a memory backup process for storing the checksum operation value in the sub-control RAM 800c (step). S1015).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a confirms whether or not the VSYNC interrupt signal has been transmitted from the VDP 803 to the sub-control CPU 800a (step S1016). If the VSYNC interrupt signal is not transmitted (step S1016: NO), the sub-control CPU 800a repeatedly executes the process of step S1016 until the VSYNC interrupt signal is transmitted, and when the VSYNC interrupt signal is transmitted. (Step S1016: YES), the process returns to the process of step S1007, and the processes of steps S1007 to S1016 are repeated.

<Sub-control: data analysis processing>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, the data analysis process in step S1014 of the main process will be described in detail. First, the sub-control CPU 800a selects the effect scenario data PS_DATA (see FIG. 9A) corresponding to the effect pattern determined by lottery in step S1012 from the effect scenario table PR_TBL, and stores it in the selected effect scenario data PS_DATA. An image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 on the VDP 803 based on various data (frame data PS_DATA10, control code data PS_DATA11, coordinate data PS_DATA12, pixel calculation data PS_DATA13, scaling data PS_DATA14) stored in the 1-layer data PS_DATA1. Generate a command list for generating data (step S1050). At this time, the normal variation 12-second variation scenario SS_DATA for decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the variable scenario ZS_DATA for resident symbols, the normal variation scenario SS1_DATA for decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 30 (a), and the decorative symbols Tempai time fluctuation scenario SS2_DATA, reach for decorative design Development fluctuation scenario SS3_DATA, SP reach fluctuation scenario for decorative design shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (a) Display per SP reach for decorative design shown in FIG. 33 (a) The scenario SS5a_DATA and the SP reach loss display scenario SS5b_DATA for decorative symbols shown in FIG. 33 (b) are selected.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a has data or a setting button 15 indicating that the pressing effect of the effect button device 13 is effective for the button data PS_DATA113 (see FIG. 9C) stored in the selected effect scenario data PS_DATA. When the data indicating that the repeated hitting effect of the above is effective is stored, the data is stored in the memory area in the sub-control RAM 800c.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a generates a control signal related to light based on the data content of the lamp data PS_DATA17 (see FIG. 9B) stored in the selected effect scenario data PS_DATA, and is in the sub-control RAM 800c. Performs the process of storing in.

Further, the sub-control CPU 800a is based on the data content of the movable accessory data PS_DATA16 (see FIG. 9B) stored in the selected effect scenario data PS_DATA, and the upper / left / right / upper left movable accessory 43a. The operation contents of to 43d are determined, and the motor data of the motor (not shown) of the movable accessory device 43 according to the determined operation contents is generated.

Furthermore, the sub-control CPU 800a generates a control signal related to sound based on the data content of the sound data PS_DATA15 (see FIG. 9B) stored in the selected effect scenario data PS_DATA (step S1051). As a result, the sound LSI 801 (see FIG. 6) reads out the sound corresponding to the control signal from the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 shown in FIGS. 14 and 17. As a result, the sound LSI 801 performs processing based on the read sound data and outputs the sound source data to the speaker 17. When the sound data stored in the sound data storage area 805c of the game ROM 805 is transferred to the predetermined storage area 802a of the sound RAM 802 using the DMA controller 800a1 (see FIG. 6), the sound shown in FIG. The BGM corresponding to the control signal is read out from the predetermined storage area 802a of the RAM 802.

Specifically, at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11B, as the effect control command DI_CMD, a start hold subtraction command (for example, B001H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 1 to 0, and a decorative symbol. Receives a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) for a variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of (special symbol) and a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, loss pattern). Then, the BGM is played back in a loop regardless of the fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds) of the decorative symbol (special symbol).

Further, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11B, when a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) is received as the effect control command DI_CMD, the sound LSI 801 is loop-reproduced. The loop playback will be performed as it is without stopping the BGM.

Thus, at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11B, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing), the BGM continues to be played in a loop. Therefore, as the BGM continues to be played in a loop, a command reception error can be sent to amusement park employees who understand the error specifications without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41. Can be notified that has occurred.

Further, in a state where the customer waiting demo command cannot be received and the BGM continues to be played in a loop, at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11B, the effect control command DI_CMD is used as a variation pattern of the decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example). When the variable pattern command (for example, A001H) of the loss pattern 1) and the symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for specifying the decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, the loss symbol) are received, the sound LSI 801 receives a new BGM. Instead of playing back, the BGM that is playing back in a loop is played back as it is. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

Even if the game state shifts to the customer waiting demo state triggered by the symbol stop command, the same processing is performed.

Thus, the sub-control CPU 800a repeats the processes of step S1050 and step S1051 until all the data based on the effect pattern determined by lottery in step S1012 shown in FIG. 56 is generated (step S1052: NO). When all the data has been generated (step S1052: YES), the process proceeds to step S1053.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a performs button activation processing based on the content stored in the sub-control RAM 800c in step S1051 and the input content of the setting button 15 or the effect button device 13 processed in step S1013 shown in FIG. 56. (Step S1053).

<Sub-control: Command reception interrupt processing>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 58, the processing when the effect control command DI_CMD and the interrupt signal are transmitted from the main control board 60 during the execution of such a main processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58, when the sub-control CPU 800a receives the interrupt signal, it executes a save process of saving the contents of each register to the stack area in the sub-control RAM 800c (step S1100). After that, the sub-control CPU 800a reads the register of the input port that has received the effect control command DI_CMD (step S1101), and calculates a pointer indicating the address address of the command transmission / reception memory area in the sub-control RAM 800c (step S1102).

After that, the sub-control CPU 800a again reads the register of the input port that has received the effect control command DI_CMD (step S1103), and whether or not the value read in step S1101 and the value read in step S1103 match. To confirm. If they do not match (step S1104: NO), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if they match (step S1104: YES), the effect control command received from the main control board 60 is sent to the address address corresponding to the calculated pointer. The DI_CMD is stored (step S1105). The stored effect control command DI_CMD will be read out to the sub-control CPU 800a during the process of step S1012 shown in FIG. 56.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a updates the pointer indicating the address address of the command transmission / reception memory area in the sub-control RAM 800c (step S1106), and restores the register saved in the process of step S1100 (step S1107). As a result, the process returns to the main process shown in FIG. 56.

<Sub-control: timer interrupt processing>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 59, the process when the timer interrupt for each 1 ms set in the process of step S1006 (see FIG. 56) of the main process occurs will be described.

As shown in FIG. 59, when a timer interrupt every 1 ms occurs, the sub-control CPU 800a executes a save process of saving the contents of each register to the stack area in the sub-control RAM 800c (step S1150).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a acquires the data of the setting button 15, the data of the effect button device 13, the motor data of the movable accessory device 43, etc. twice (step S1151), and whether the acquired data match. It is confirmed whether or not (step S1152). If the data do not match (step S1152: NO), the sub-control CPU 800a repeats the process of step S1151 until the data match, and if they match (step S1152: YES), the sub-control RAM 800c uses the matched data. Store in (step S1153).

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a receives a signal from the setting button 15 or the effect button device 13 (step S1154). This received signal will be analyzed by the button analysis process of step S1013 shown in FIG.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a control signal regarding the light stored in the sub-control RAM 800c in step S1051 shown in FIG. 57 to the decorative lamp substrate 90 (see FIG. 6) (step S1155). A control signal necessary for turning on or off the identification lamp device 50A (see FIG. 5) is also transmitted.

By the way, when the decorative lamps such as the LED lamps mounted on the decorative lamp substrate 90 (see FIG. 6) are turned on or off, the effect control command DI_CMD will be described specifically at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11 (b). , The start hold subtraction command (for example, B001H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 1 to 0, and the variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol). , When a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a lost symbol) is received, the decorative symbol (special symbol) changes regardless of the fluctuation time (for example, 120 seconds). The lamp effect will be executed in a loop.

Further, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11B, when a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) is received as the effect control command DI_CMD, the fluctuation is executed in a loop. The lamp effect is not stopped, and the loop is executed as it is.

Thus, at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11B, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing), the variable lamp effect continues to be executed in a loop. Therefore, by continuing to execute the variable lamp effect in a loop, employees of the amusement park who understand the error specifications without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41, etc. It is possible to notify that a command reception error has occurred.

By the way, as the lamp effect, instead of executing the variable lamp effect as described above in a loop, the symbol stop lamp effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 11 (c). That is, at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11 (c), when a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the decorative symbol (special symbol) is received as the effect control command DI_CMD, the symbol stop lamp effect is executed. Will be. This symbol stop lamp effect is to continue a looped pattern by lowering the brightness of a decorative lamp such as an LED lamp that produces a lamp effect effect, or to continue a pattern in which the decorative lamp is repeatedly turned on and off. Is.

Even in this way, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing) at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11C, the symbol stop lamp effect will continue to be executed. Therefore, by continuing to execute the symbol stop lamp effect, even if the liquid crystal display device 41 does not display a "command reception error", it is possible to inform the employees of the amusement park who understand the error specifications. It is possible to notify that a command reception error has occurred.

Further, in a state where the customer waiting demo command cannot be received and the variable lamp effect continues to be executed in a loop, a decorative symbol (special symbol) is used as the effect control command DI_CMD at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11 (b). When the fluctuation pattern command (for example, A001H) of the fluctuation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) and the symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, loss symbol) are received, a loop is performed. The variable lamp effect that is being executed is not stopped, but is executed in a loop as it is. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

Even if the game state shifts to the customer waiting demo state triggered by the symbol stop command, the same processing is performed.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a restores the register saved in the process of step S1150 (step S1156). As a result, the process returns to the main process shown in FIG. 56.

<Sub-control: command list>
Here, the command list generated in step S1050 shown in FIG. 57 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60.

This command list is a command sequence in which commands for VDP803 (command parser 8035) are listed, but the description contents and description order are slightly different depending on whether a moving image is instructed or a still image is instructed. It's different.

When instructing VDP803 to draw a moving image, the initial command list in FIG. 60 (a) and the stationary command list in FIG. 60 (b) are configured.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the sub-control CPU 800a first generates a command for setting a memory area of the DDR2 SDRAM 804 in which the frame buffer area is set and a memory area for storing the moving image data of the DDR2 SDRAM 804 (). Step S1200). In setting the memory area of the DDR2 SDRAM 804 in which the frame buffer area is set, the image size data PS_DATA112 shown in FIG. 9C is referred to. That is, if the size is, for example, 640 × 320, the memory area corresponding to the size is set.

Next, a command for instructing the decoding of the moving image is generated (step S1201). Specifically, it is an instruction as to which video compressed data is to be decoded, and is the address address of the CG data storage area 805a of the game ROM 805 shown in FIGS. 14 and 17 in which the corresponding video is stored and the number of frames of the video. And so on. For the address address of the CG data storage area 805a in which the corresponding moving image is stored, the address data PS_DATA111 shown in FIG. 9C is referred to, and the number of frames of the moving image is the frame data shown in FIG. 9B. PS_DATA10 is referenced.

Next, the end processing command is entered and the generation of the initial command list is completed (step S1202).

Subsequently, the sub-control CPU 800a generates the stationary command list shown in FIG. 60 (b).

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), this stationary command list is composed of moving image drawing instructions, and in the above initial command list, the decoded data of which frame number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 with respect to the decoded moving image data. A command for drawing at which coordinate position of the throat is generated (step S1203). Next, a command for termination processing is entered to complete the generation of the steady-state command list (step S1204). For the command generation for this drawing instruction, the frame data PS_DATA10, the coordinate data PS_DATA12, the pixel calculation data PS_DATA13, and the scaling data PS_DATA14 shown in FIG. 9B are referred to.

On the other hand, when instructing the VDP 803 to draw a still image, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the sub-control CPU 800a first stores the memory area of the DDR2 SDRAM 804 in which the frame buffer area is set, and the still image data. A command for setting the memory area of the built-in VRAM8040 is generated (step S1210). In setting the memory area of the DDR2 SDRAM 804 in which the frame buffer area is set, the image size data PS_DATA112 shown in FIG. 9C is referred to. That is, if the size is, for example, 640 × 320, the memory area corresponding to the size is set.

Next, a command for instructing the decoding of the still image is generated (step S1211). Specifically, it is an instruction as to which still image compressed data is to be decoded, such as the address address and data size of the CG data storage area 805a of the game ROM 805 shown in FIGS. 14 and 17 in which the corresponding still image is stored. Instruct with. For the address address of the CG data storage area 805a in which the corresponding still image is stored, the address data PS_DATA111 shown in FIG. 9C is referred to, and the data size is the image size data PS_DATA112 shown in FIG. 9C. Is referenced.

Next, a command for drawing the decoded still image data at which coordinate position of the liquid crystal display device 41 and in what mode (rotation angle, reduction / enlargement, etc.) is generated (step S1212). Next, a command for end processing is entered to complete the generation of the command list related to the still image (step S1213). For the command generation for this drawing instruction, the frame data PS_DATA10, the coordinate data PS_DATA12, the pixel calculation data PS_DATA13, and the scaling data PS_DATA14 shown in FIG. 9B are referred to.

Thus, the command list related to such moving images and the command list related to still images are transmitted to VDP803 (see FIG. 11), appropriately processed, and then transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, the desired image (for example, FIGS. 11 to 13, 19, 28, and 34) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Specifically, at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11B, as the effect control command DI_CMD, a start hold subtraction command (for example, B001H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 1 to 0, and a decorative symbol (special). Upon receiving a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) for a variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of a symbol) and a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern). The variable image will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Further, when a symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) for stopping the special symbol is received as the effect control command DI_CMD at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11 (b), the image in which the change of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped is displayed. It will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has stopped is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, in this way, even if the customer waiting demo command cannot be received (missing) at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11 (b), the image in which the change of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has stopped is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It will continue to be displayed on the device 41. Therefore, by continuing to display the image in which the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has stopped, the game understands the error specifications without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is possible to notify the employees of the field that a command reception error has occurred.

Further, in a state where the customer waiting demo command cannot be received and the image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has stopped is continuously displayed, the decoration is performed as the effect control command DI_CMD at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11 (b). A fluctuation pattern command (for example, A001H) for a fluctuation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of a symbol (special symbol), and a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a loss pattern). Upon reception, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variation image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is started from the image in which the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo command is not provided and the game state shifts to the customer waiting demo state triggered by the symbol stop command, the effect control command DI_CMD is used at the timing T10 shown in FIG. 11 (b). A start hold subtraction command (for example, B001H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from 1 to 0, a variation pattern command (for example, A001H) of a variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of a decorative symbol (special symbol), When a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a lost symbol) is received, the variable image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

In this variation image, the variation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is displayed, but since the variation time of the decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, 120 seconds) is fixed, the determined variation time (for example, 120 seconds) is determined. , 120 seconds, etc.), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) will be shaken.

The fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is stopped when the sub-control CPU 800a receives the symbol stop command (for example, BF01H). However, assuming that the symbol stop command (for example, BF01H) could not be received by the sub-control CPU 800a, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 in a loop state. It becomes.

Thus, in this way, even if the symbol stop command cannot be received (missing) at the timing T11 shown in FIG. 12 (b), the image in which the decorative symbol (special symbol) is shaken and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It will be displayed on the device 41 in a loop state. Therefore, by continuing to display the image in which the decorative design (special design) is shaking and fluctuating in a loop state, the error specifications are understood without displaying a "command reception error" on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is possible to notify the employees of the amusement park, etc., that a command reception error has occurred.

By the way, in a state where the symbol stop demo command cannot be received and the image in which the decorative symbol (special symbol) is swaying and fluctuating is continuously displayed in a loop state, the effect control command is displayed at the timing T13 shown in FIG. As DI_CMD, a fluctuation pattern command (for example, A001H) of a variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of a decorative symbol (special symbol), and a symbol designation command (for example, a loss pattern) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, loss pattern). , BB01H), the variable image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, the image in which the decorative symbol (special symbol) is swaying and fluctuating is continuously displayed in a loop state, but the fluctuation image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 when the game ball wins a prize. As a result, when the error state is changed to the normal gaming state, the player can play the game without a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, when the effect control command DI_CMD, which is a start hold subtraction command for subtracting the number of start hold balls from 3 to 2, cannot be received by the sub control CPU 800a, the speed is high as shown in FIG. 13 (a-5). The fluctuating decorative symbol (special symbol) is displayed (see image P4), and the state in which three start-holding balls are held is displayed as it is (see image P1). That is, the number of start-holding balls actually stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c and the number of start-holding balls displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 do not match. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 13 (c-1), the state in which three balls are held as start holding balls continues to be displayed (see image P1), and the decorative symbol (special symbol) fluctuating at high speed changes. , As shown in FIG. 13 (c-2), stop (in the figure, stop in a state where the combination symbol is "123" lost) (see image P7). After that, as the effect control command DI_CMD, the start hold subtraction command (for example, B002H) in which the number of start hold balls is subtracted from two to one, and the variation pattern (for example, loss pattern 1) of the decorative symbol (special symbol) When a variable pattern command (for example, A001H) or a symbol designation command (for example, BB01H) for designating a decorative symbol (special symbol) (for example, a lost symbol) is received, the speed is as shown in FIG. 13 (c-3). A fluctuating decorative pattern (special pattern) is displayed (see image P8). Further, the liquid crystal display device 41 instantly displays a state in which two balls are held as start holding balls (see image P11). At this time, instead of displaying an animation on the liquid crystal display device 41 in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted from the number of start-holding balls that is erased from three to two, three pieces are held as start-holding balls. The display will be switched instantly from the state in which the image is on to the state in which two images are on hold.

Then, from this state, an animation in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted so that the number of start-holding balls is erased from two to one is started, and as shown in FIG. 13 (c-4), the liquid crystal is displayed. The display device 41 displays an animation (see image P12) in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted so that the number of start-holding balls is erased from two to one (see image P12). ), The state in which one ball is held as a start holding ball is displayed (see image P13). As a result, the number of start-holding balls actually stored in the normal RAM area 600ca (see FIG. 8A) of the main control RAM 600c and the displayed number of start-holding balls match.

By doing so, the player is accustomed to instantly switching the display from the state in which the number of start-holding balls is held to 3 to the state in which 2 are held, and the number is subtracted from 2 to 1. Since the animation is displayed, it is possible to return to the start hold display in which the number of normal start hold balls is displayed without giving the player a great sense of discomfort. As a result, the player can continue the game without feeling unnatural. Further, it is not necessary to separately prepare an animation in which the number of start-holding balls is subtracted from the number of start-holding balls of 3 to 1 by erasing 2 pieces.

On the other hand, at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, when the sub-control CPU 800a receives the variation pattern command transmitted as the effect control command DI_CMD from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a), FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (e). As shown in the above, an image in which the decorative symbol and the resident symbol are changed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. When FIG. 19B is displayed, the resident symbol is instantly switched to a predetermined resident symbol (see image P11A).

However, by starting the variation of the resident symbol from the predetermined symbol regardless of the previous stop symbol in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the decorative symbol and the resident symbol. .. Furthermore, since the resident symbols are only switched instantly, control can be simplified.

Next, at the timing T2A shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for rapidly changing the decorative symbol (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol) to VDP803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), an image in which the decorative pattern (see image P18A) fluctuates at high speed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T3A shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the left decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (g), an image in which the left decorative symbol (see image P19Aa) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the left decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (g), an image in which the left decorative symbol (see image P19Aa) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further, as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the left. An image in which the decorative pattern (see image P20Aa) is decelerating and fluctuating is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T3Aa shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for stopping or shaking the left decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (i), the left decorative symbol (see image P21Aa) becomes a stop symbol (“2” in the figure) of the left decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, and is stopped or stopped. The shaking and fluctuating image will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T4A shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the right decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19J, an image in which the right decorative symbol (see image P22Ac) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the right decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (j), an image in which the right decorative symbol (see image P22Ac) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further, as shown in FIG. 19 (k), the right. An image in which the decorative pattern (see image P23Ac) is decelerating and fluctuating is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T4Aa shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for stopping or shaking the right decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (l), the right decorative symbol (see image P24Ac) becomes a stop symbol (“3” in the figure) of the right decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, and is stopped or stopped. The shaking and fluctuating image will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T5A shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the intermediate decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (m), an image in which the intermediate decorative symbol (see image P25Ab) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (m), an image in which the middle decorative symbol (see image P25Ab) is decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further, as shown in FIG. 19 (n), the middle is displayed. An image in which the decorative pattern (see image P26Ab) is decelerating and fluctuating is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T5Aa shown in FIG. 20, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for stopping or shaking the intermediate decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 19 (o), the intermediate decorative symbol (see image P27Ab) becomes a stop symbol (“5” in the figure) of the intermediate decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, and is stopped or stopped. The shaking and fluctuating image will be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, when a symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) as the effect control command DI_CMD at the timing T6A shown in FIG. 20, as shown in FIG. 19 (p), the liquid crystal display device 41 receives a symbol. The stopped decorative symbol (see image P28A) and the stopped resident symbol (see image P29A) are displayed. At this time, the resident symbol is switched to the stopped symbol regardless of the update order of the changing symbols.

By doing so, it is only necessary to replace the fluctuating resident symbol with the stop symbol, so that the control can be simplified. Furthermore, it is possible to replace the resident symbol with a stopped symbol without waiting for the timing at which the resident symbol is switched to the next resident symbol. At this time, the number of frames is smaller than the number of frames required to switch to the next resident symbol, but the scrolling does not change like the decorative symbol, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, since the resident symbol can be stopped in the same state as the decorative symbol is stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the decorative symbol and the resident symbol.

On the other hand, at the timing T5Ab shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for notifying the reach to the liquid crystal display device 41 to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (i), the characters "reach!" Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 (see image P40A).

Further, at the timing T5Ab shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for decelerating and fluctuating the intermediate decorative symbol to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 28 (j) to 28 (k), an image in which the intermediate decorative symbols (see images P41Ab and P42Ab) are decelerated and fluctuated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. At this time, in order to match the stop symbol of the intermediate decorative symbol determined at the timing T1A shown in FIG. 20, the VDP 803 switches to the symbol at which the deceleration fluctuation starts and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Thus, as shown in FIG. 28 (j), an image in which the intermediate decorative symbol (see image P41Ab) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and further shown in FIG. 28 (k). As described above, the image in which the intermediate decorative pattern (see image P42Ab) decelerates and fluctuates is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, at the timing T5Ac shown in FIG. 29, the sub-control CPU 800a changes the left and right decorative symbols to numerical symbols, and transmits a command list for changing the intermediate decorative symbols at high speed to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (l), the left decorative symbol (see image P43Aa) and the right decorative symbol (see image P43Ac) are changed to numerical symbols, and the middle decorative symbol (see image P43Ab) fluctuates at high speed. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for displaying the left and right decorative symbols in the upper corner of the screen to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (m), the left decorative symbol of the numerical symbol (see image P44Aa) is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the right decorative symbol of the numerical symbol (see image P44Ac) is liquid crystal. It will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the display device 41.

Next, the sub-control CPU 800a transmits a command list for notifying the liquid crystal display device 41 of the SP reach to the VDP 803. In response to this, VDP803 generates image (video) data so as to display an image based on the command list, and transmits the generated image (video) data to the liquid crystal display device 41. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28 (n), the characters "SP reach" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 (see image P45A).

However, in this way, the decorative symbol is changed to only the numerical symbol after the reach effect occurs, while the resident symbol continues to fluctuate only with the numerical symbol, and even if the reach effect occurs, it does not change. Continue to do. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the resident symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control CPU 600a) is received at the timing T1A, the resident symbol becomes a liquid crystal display device as shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state in which the stop display (see image P50A) is displayed on 41 shifts to the state in which the high-speed fluctuation display (see image P51A) is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (b). On the other hand, as the decorative design, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the one enlarged and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is displayed (see image P52A). This is one of the notice productions using decorative patterns. After that, at the timing T1Aa shown in FIG. 35, the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, and at the timing T2A, the high-speed fluctuation display (see image P53A) is performed as shown in FIG. 34 (c).

By the way, even if the advance notice effect using the symbol is generated and the variation of the decorative symbol is started with a delay, by starting the variation of the resident symbol, the player can change the symbol. Can be reliably notified that has started.

By the way, such a command list will instruct the drawing of a still image after instructing the drawing of a moving image. That is, the sub-control CPU 800a uses the effect control command DI_CMD transmitted from the main control CPU 600a to produce any one of the plurality of effect scenario data PS_DATA stored in the effect scenario table PR_TBL shown in FIG. 9 (a). This is because the scenario data PS_DATA is selected, the one-layer data PS_DATA1 stored in the selected effect scenario data PS_DATA is referred to in order from the lowest priority, and a command list is generated. That is, according to the present embodiment, the control code data such that the data PS_DATA110 (see FIG. 9 (c)) showing the moving image is referred to from the control table CH_TBL shown in FIG. 9 (c) at the position where the priority is low. PS_DATA11 is stored, and the control code data PS_DATA11 such that the data PS_DATA110 (see FIG. 9C) indicating a still image is referred to from the control table CH_TBL shown in FIG. 9C is stored in a position having a high priority. Therefore, the command list instructing the drawing of the moving image is generated first, and then the command list instructing the drawing of the still image is generated. As a result, after the moving image data is drawn, the still image data is overwritten and drawn on the drawn moving image data, so that the image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is generated.

By overwriting the still image data on the drawn moving image data in this way, the image data is generated, so that the characters can be clearly displayed even in the compressed image.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment described above, it is possible to simplify the control of the resident symbol and further prevent the player from misidentifying the decorative symbol and the resident symbol.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game is restarted while the game may be affected.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the limited program capacity can be efficiently used.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the efficiency of development can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently control and flexibly respond to data changes due to development.

In this embodiment, only an example in which lighting is displayed as a display method of the measurement / setting display device 610 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the measurement / setting display device 610 is blinked and displayed while the setting is being changed. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sound LSI 801 and the VDP 803 are separately configured, but they may be integrated as one chip.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame buffer area is set in the DDR2 SDRAM 804, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame buffer area may be set in the built-in VRAM 8040.

Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the sub-control CPU 800a is provided in the sub-one-chip microcomputer 800 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub-control CPU 800a may be provided in the VDP 803.

1 Pachinko game machine 41 Liquid crystal display device (display means)
60 Main control board 80 Sub control board 800a Sub control CPU (notice effect execution means)
SS_DATA Normal fluctuation 12 seconds fluctuation scenario for decorative design SS1_DATA Normal fluctuation scenario for decorative design SS2_DATA Tempai time fluctuation scenario for decorative design SS3_DATA Reach development fluctuation scenario for decorative design SS4_DATA SP reach fluctuation scenario for decorative design SS5a_DATA Scenario SS5b_DATA SP reach out of display scenario for decorative symbols ZS_DATA Variable scenario for resident symbols

Claims (1)

A decorative symbol displayed on the display means along with the identification information corresponding to the lottery result when the lottery process caused by the predetermined signal is executed.
A resident symbol that is resident and displayed on the display means in a size smaller than the decorative symbol.
It has a notice effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notice effect, and has.
The plurality of decorative symbols are displayed on the display means in a variation mode according to the variation content and variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result.
The plurality of resident symbols are composed of numerical symbols.
When the resident symbol is stopped, the numerical symbol is displayed on the display means in a stop mode indicated by the same number as the number indicated by the stop symbol of the plurality of decorative symbols, and further.
When the resident symbol is fluctuating, the number symbol is used as the display means in a variation mode in which the numbers indicated by the resident symbols are sequentially added or subtracted regardless of the fluctuation content of the fluctuation pattern. What is displayed,
The plurality of decorative symbols are in a semi-transparent state when the deceleration variation is started when the variation mode of at least one decorative symbol is switched from the high-speed variation to the deceleration variation and then can be determined to be stopped or stopped. The decorative symbol that fluctuates at high speed is replaced with a decorative symbol that matches the stop symbol that can be determined to be stopped or stopped after the deceleration fluctuation, and the deceleration fluctuation is started.
When the plurality of resident symbols start to change, regardless of the numerical symbol of the resident symbol that was stopped last time, after switching to a different predetermined resident symbol numerical symbol, the display mode of the changing resident symbol reaches. It is switched to be sequentially added or subtracted without becoming a mode and a hit mode, and is variablely displayed on the display means.
When the plurality of decorative symbols start to change in a variation manner according to the variation content and variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the lottery result, the resident symbol starts to change, but the decorative symbol stops last time. After executing the predetermined advance notice effect for changing the decorative symbol to a predetermined display mode that can be recognized by the player, the resident symbol is started to change by a predetermined time later than the start of the change, and the predetermined time is delayed. The decorative symbol is a gaming machine in which the fluctuation is stopped at the same timing as the timing at which the fluctuation is stopped in the fluctuation mode when the effect is not executed.

Images